UFOs, Earthquakes and the Straight Line Mystery The Answer to the UFO Enigma Ahmad Jamaludin Published by FLYING DISK PRESS 4 St Michaels Avenue Pontefract, West Yorkshire England WF8 4QX Copyright © 2021 by Ahmad Jamaludin. All rights reserved. Without limiting the rights under copyright reserved above, no part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in, or introduced into a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form by any means (electronics, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise), without the prior written permission of both the copyright owner and the publisher of this book. Cover design is copyright © Jason Gleaves. 1 Table of Contents Introduction Chapter 1: Facts About the UFO Phenomenon Chapter 2: Facts About Earthquakes Chapter 3: Comparison Between UFOs and Earthquakes Chapter 4: Orthoteny – The Straight Line Mystery Chapter 5: Patterns Seen in Large Earthquakes & Major UFO Waves Chapter 6: Major UFO Waves Cycles & Its Interpretations Chapter 7: UFO Waves & the Imaginary Loop Effect Over Europe Chapter 8: The Seesaw Effect of UFO Clusters and Earthquake Epicentres Chapter 9: Meteors, Booms, Exploding Sounds, UFOs &Earthquakes Chapter 10: Are Large Earthquakes & Major UFO Waves Related? Chapter 11: Earthquakes in Sumatra, UFOs in Malaysia – Search for a Connection Chapter 12: Source X: Its Nature and Possible Stimulus of UFOs and Earthquakes? Chapter 13: The Universe, Aliens & Source X as Mentioned in the Islamic Quran Chapter 14: The UFO Jigsaw Puzzle Solved! Appendix A: TIME DILATION OBSERVED IN UFO AND BUNIAN ABDUCTION EVENTS. Appendix B: GLOBAL RECORDS AND TRENDS OF METEORITE FALLS. Appendix C: WHAT TRIGGERS SUNSPOTS? Appendix D: A SIMPLE GUIDE ON HOW TO PREDICT EARTHQUAKES. 2 Introduction The UFO phenomenon is an old one stretching back into the ancient past. It has been with us as long as the history of mankind. Even in this modern era of computer technology and the advancement of science in every discipline, understanding it is the number one mystery facing mankind today, unfortunately it is still controversial. We are still a long way from comprehending this baffling enigma. These strange anomalous flying objects were called by various names in the historical past, from Mystery Airships (1896,1897), Ghost Flyers (1909), Phantom Airships (1913), Foo Fighters (1944-45), Ghost Rockets (1946), Flying Saucers (1947) and finally in this modern era, UFOs. This name was given by Captain Edward J. Ruppelt, who headed Project Blue Book for the United States Airforce and seems the most apt way to describe the phenomenon – it is something that is flying and is unidentified! To date, we are still at a loss to explain its true nature, identity and possible origin. And ironically, there were no serious official attempts to study it and arrive at some conclusion regarding its nature. The first official study of UFOs made by the US government as a result of the wave of reports in 1947, was made primarily to document the cases and it tried to eliminate as many of the reports as possible and attribute them to natural, mundane causes such as meteorological conditions, stars, planets and birds. The few remaining cases at their disposal, which were less than 10 %, could not be swept under the carpet due to their high-strangeness rating and they had been seen by credible, technically trained witnesses, were referred to as ‘unidentified’. No further action, however, was taken to study and identify the true nature of the reports in this unexplained category. If their study had been objective, the 10% of the unidentified reports represented the cream of the crop and might actually help us understand the true nature of the phenomenon. The study carried out in analyzing the UFO cases appeared not to have been done in good faith. This was in reference to the initial study carried out in the United States in 1948 called Project Sign, then changed to Project Grudge and finally renamed Project Bluebook. The study was deliberately undertaken to not find the true identity of the phenomenon, but merely to assess the possible threat the phenomenon could pose to the national security of the United States. 3 The bottom line was the premise that with enough additional information, all of the unidentified cases could be dismissed as of being of natural origin. This meant that there are no alien visitors to Earth! But the reality is that UFOs are not going away. It is now seventy years since Kenneth Arnold’s famous 1947 sighting and even today the intensity of the sightings has not declined. The nature and characteristics of the phenomenon still remain the same as their historical counterparts. The phenomenon has become part of our lives. While most of the UFO sighting reports were isolated, random events, there were times when it occurs with such an intensity that it is called a UFO wave, as if the sky just opens up and UFOs are sighted almost every night. And as suddenly as it appears, after a certain duration the phenomenon, abruptly ceases. When a UFO wave occurred, the number of encounters with alien-like beings and sightings of anomalous lights in the night sky would surge. There have been major events such as the 1954 French UFO wave, where over 200 landings were recorded in a short span of time and they were clustered in a small geographical region. The French wave then spread to Italy as it shifted eastwards in time and space. During this period, a flurry of sightings were also documented in other far off lands. Something from August through to December 1954, either psychological or objective seemed to stimulate hundreds of people across the continent to see and report similar unexplained events. Another big UFO comeback occurred in 1973 sticking primarily to the southeastern region of the United States. Just like the 1954 French UFO wave, there were many sightings of unidentified lighted flying objects and encounters with alien humanoids. And yet there were no serious attempts by any governments to find its possible cause. Not only that, major newspapers around the world have either ridiculed the subject, or shied away from it all together. Since we have no knowledge whatsoever regarding whether other intelligent beings exist in the universe, we are at a loss to verify whether or not the sightings of UFOs and their occupants are a true representation of interstellar visitors. However sociologists and psychologists grabbed the opportunity to attribute them to hysteria, mass delusion or what they termed as ‘moral panic’. Most of the time, whether objective or subjective in nature, the phenomenon continues to occur on a daily basis as isolated events somewhere on Earth. 4 If the UFO syndrome is a mental problem we have no cure for it. Alternately, if the UFO phenomenon is a cosmic event, we unfortunately still do not have a satisfactory explanation. After the termination of the official study of UFOs in the United States in 1969, the status quo of the phenomenon remained the same as it did in 1947. No progress whatsoever has been made. We seem to be unable to explain the validity of the UFO sighting reports or to make some sense of them. Sociologists and psychologists did attempt to meet numerous scared witnesses in an effort to understand what internal or external factors could possibly have caused them to report such bizarre sightings and encounters in the first place. Astrophysicists and other space scientists seem unperturbed about the numerous and continuing reports of possible alien-like visitations. If someone is looking for gold, a sudden reflection in the sand would have got them excited, but in the case of encounters with possible alien humanoids, no space scientist has bothered to look at the cases to see if there is any merit in the reports. They seem either unconcerned or cannot accept the possibility that alien beings from some distant stars have finally reached us. Something of an external or internal nature must be causing the witnesses to report what they had allegedly seen. Unfortunately, most of the behavioral and space scientists just prefer to shy away from this controversial subject. With this attitude science has lost a golden opportunity to engage with a phenomenon that we do not understand. The UFO phenomenon is a transient event. It does not manifest long enough for any detailed scientific scrutiny. These events cannot be studied in situ, but by analyzing the accumulated data a meaningful conclusion could be reached regarding whether they are real or not. The fact is that we have a wealth of data to fully understand the UFO phenomenon. Even if we are not advocating alien visitations, we can at least try to understand the human psychology that makes outrageous claims of meeting with UFOs or alien beings. But what if the reports are actually what they say they are – alien visitations? If that is the case, we would be dumbfounded as we have absolutely no knowledge of the existence of other life-forms except here on Earth. To add to the problem, we have not yet attained the technological breakthrough for a faster mode of interstellar flight. The only one we have at present is the use 5 of liquid hydrogen as a propulsion system to escape the pull of gravity and venture into our own Solar System. To go beyond that, to the distant stars, is an almost impossible task using our present technology. Astrophysicists have been talking about Black Holes and Wormholes. The possibilities for short cuts in interstellar travel are there, but our knowledge of the universe is still infinitesimally small when compared to its sheer size. Perhaps a thousand years from now we might have acquired new knowledge and understanding of the universe. By that time there is a possibility, with new technologies, that we could build our very own UFOs – the very flying objects that we refuse to take seriously today. Just imagine if only one case from all those thousands of unidentified cases actually represented the arrival on Earth of alien visitor from some star system. That would certainly be a major breakthrough in our scientific understanding of the existence of other intelligent life forms in this universe. At present only mankind appears to exist in this universe. This actually make no sense, logically or scientifically, as there are thousands of other Earth-like planets in the universe. This book looks at the UFO subject from an entirely different perspective, in the sense of what actually triggers or aids the appearance of UFOs on Earth. It also looks at the possibilities and presents evidence for what is actually causing earthquakes here on earth. The close relationship between UFOs and earthquakes observed in time and space, make it possible to construct a holistic picture of why both apparently unrelated events are somehow connected. The UFO phenomenon is at present an event that is outside our scientific frame of reference. To be accepted as part of science, it must provide the parameters and empirical evidence needed. This book tries to do just that using the available supporting observations and evidence. The evidence to support the existence of UFOs in our reality is overwhelming. All we have to do is look at it with an objective and open mind. While there are abundant facts, the willingness to pursue the matter is lacking or non-existent. Science, in the controversial field of ufology, was deprived of its opportunity to progress. 6 Our biggest scientific jackpot could probably be hidden in the study of the UFO phenomenon as indicated in this book. *** 7 Chapter 1 Facts About the UFO Phenomenon The presence of the UFO mystery in our environment is a simple and direct manifestation. It could either be subjective or objective in nature. In other words it is real or it is not. The phenomenon could well be just the product of our imaginations, or it could really be physically out there. Either way, without any in depth study, we are ignoring a chance to learn something new about it. Reports of Unidentified Flying Objects made across the globe over the years, has shown us the basic characteristics of this phenomenon. We are actually not entirely in the dark about this mystery. We know how it behaves, what it looks like, how it responds to human presence, where and when it appears etc. So let’s go through some of the facts that we knew about UFOs thus far. Nature or Form UFOs or Unidentified Flying Objects were sighted mainly in the sky and mostly during the night. They appeared to be a form of controlled flying devices. However they do not appear to fly on the principle of lift, thrust and drag. How they operate in our environment seems to defy our laws of physics and gravity. During nocturnal hours, the phenomenon can present itself either as a bright luminous body, a glowing pulsating or flickering light, or a black body with navigational-type lights positioned either at the top, bottom or its ends. UFOs can emit lights across the colour spectrum. The lights can be in the form of a glow which originates from its entire body. Some researchers associate the colour changes with the speed of the object. However, some UFOs produce multi-coloured lights while flying at a steady, slow speed. The most common lights associated with UFOs are red, white and yellow. In the daytime, UFOs appear solid and metallic-looking. The most common colour described is either white or grey. Daylight UFOs lack luminousity or glow, probably because they are over shadowed by the bright sunlight. UFOs have smooth bodies without any observable joints, rivets or protrusions, except occasionally for antenna-like structures, or a dome on top of it. Their lack of any form of wings or stabilizers easily differentiates them from normal aircraft. 8 Energy Emission UFOs emit energy in the form of electromagnetic waves. This is evident as their close approach to electrical appliances can cause interruption to their use, this can occur to television sets, radios and electrical systems in cars and airplanes. There have been numerous instances whereby UFO manifestations caused, or coincided with, local and large-scale power blackouts. Animals can detect these ultra-low electromagnetic (ULF) emissions causing them to panic. A magnetometer usually can detect these magnetic emissions during close approaches of UFOs. UFOs also produce energy in the form of heat, as this is often felt by witnesses standing close to them during take off. This is further confirmed by the fact that these objects leave burn marks on the ground upon landing. Geomagnetic Anomalies The appearances of UFOs have been documented as being associated with ground geomagnetic disturbances (Poher 1974). However, it cannot be confirmed whether this anomaly was induced by the UFOs or the UFOs appeared because of these geomagnetic anomalies. But it seems that UFOs were somehow associated with these anomalous areas. It is possible that an unknown outside factor is at play? On a minor scale, the appearance of UFOs can cause compass needles to spin. The magnetic nature of UFOs appears to cause an aberration or interruption in the local magnetic field of the Earth. Shape and Size UFOs are reportedly seen in various shapes and sizes. But the most common shapes seen are discs. These discs are round and some have the traditional plate or saucer shape. Some UFOs have a dome or a bulge at the top or on the bottom. Another common description of UFOs are spherical forms. These round balllike objects when sighted at night, because of their luminous or glowing nature, could be mistaken for natural fireballs or meteors. However, unlike meteors or fireballs, UFOs do not exhibit smoky tails or flames. Egg-shaped or oval flying objects are the third category of commonly reported shapes. Next to be reported are cylindrical or torpedo-shaped objects. Triangular-shaped UFOs are also just as common as the cylindrical forms. 9 In the lesser category of reported shapes are squares, trapeziums, boomerangshapes or some other exotic forms. Regardless of their shapes or sizes, all UFOs show the same characteristics in their flight behaviour, performance, luminosity or glow and colour changing patterns etc. The size of a UFO may vary from as small as a dinner plate to as large as several football fields. However, very small and very large UFOs are not a common sight. Most are reported to be anywhere between the size of a car and a few hundred feet in length, i.e. the size of a commercial jet. A small number of the sightings reported indicate that some UFOs can change their size or form. There are also reports of UFOs splitting their body into two or more parts, and then flying away. Later, they were seen to return and unite again as one body. Size and shape changing UFOs are not commonly observed. Flight Characteristics UFOs demonstrate various kinds of flight performance, some of which cannot be duplicated by any terrestrial flying machines, such as making 90 degrees turns, instantaneous stops from high speed, and rapid acceleration from zero speed etc. In a continuous flight mode, the object or light usually displayed some erratic movements, such as zig-zagging, undulating bobbling movements, or some directional changes, but on the whole they seemed to be on a predetermined heading. These types of movements could eliminate the possibility that the lights were airplanes, meteors or comets. The zig-zagging type of flight indicates that while the flight is not dependent on wind conditions, it is somehow related to the Earth’s magnetic field. If UFOs are electromagnetic objects, then it is possible that the Earth’s magnetic field would have an influence on their performance. In the loitering mode, the UFO or light can circle and remain in an area for a certain period of time. In such cases, if it was seen at close range helicopters or airplanes could be eliminated, as there is no sound. In the stationary or hovering mode, if it is too high up in the sky, there is a possibility that it could just be a planet or star, but most hovering or motionless objects or lights sighted were quite low. 10 In the hovering mode, some UFOs could be seen to slightly waver to the left or right and at other times they could be seen bobbling up and down: these are signs of lateral instability. There were on many occasions where the object, almost always solitary, stood motionless in the sky as if waiting for something, perhaps for the correct moment to execute an event. Then suddenly the body would brightly flare up, or its luminosity intensified and it shot up with lightning speed into the night sky at an angle and disappeared from view within seconds. All these events happen in complete silence. These are common sights and are reported across the globe. Interestingly, some of the UFOs exhibit slow bodily rotation in flight. While frisbees and boomerangs need fast rotation to maintain flight and direction, UFOs do not appear to depend on their body rotation to attain lift. This rotation is possibly directly related to their energy emission and flight orientation. The speed of the objects varies from very slow to exceptionally fast, travelling at well over Mach 4 with no sonic boom. They can change direction instantaneously or come to a dead stop from a considerable speed. On the whole, UFOs do not seem to be affected by the Earth’s gravity, or they could be gravity-free flying devices. Area of Manifestation Studies carried out by Persinger and Lefreniere (1979) showed that over 70% of UFO sightings were made near fault lines, or in areas of seismic activity. Numerous sightings made around the world indicate that UFO manifestations are somehow related to earthquakes. There were many instances of UFOs being sighted before, during and after earth tremors. A search for a relationship between UFO sightings made in Malaysia and the earthquakes that occurred in nearby island of Sumatra, Indonesia indicated that most of the UFOs appeared in Malaysia less than 24 hours before or after the quake (see Chapter 11). Minor seismic activity in Sumatra produced no corresponding UFO reports in Malaysia. Areas or regions with no fault lines or seismic activity usually had low to no UFO sighting reports. Distribution of Sightings Most of the UFO sightings made across the world were random, isolated events. Occasionally, the sightings would bunch up in a small area in the form of cluster or flurry of sightings. This form of low intensity sightings would last for just a few days. 11 About once a year, UFO sightings would spike and cluster over a wide area for a certain period of time, this is known as a UFO wave. The intensity is usually high, with a peak period before the wave either ceased or progressed to a new location. A UFO wave could last between one to several weeks. The French UFO researcher, Aime Michel, discovered during the 1954 UFO wave that sightings made in a 24-hour period tend to be in a straight line configuration (Michel, 1958). The same trend was also seen in the United States, South America and the Iberian Peninsula. This fact is the most significant clue in understanding the UFO mystery. Unfortunately, due to the fact that there is no consensus as to the cause, this fact had been assumed to be a coincidence, overlooked and forgotten. Peak Period of UFO Events On a daily basis it has been observed around the world that UFO sightings usually tend to peak around 8 to 10 pm local time. A minor second peak could be seen around 3 or 4 am. These peaks indicated that the night-time orientation of the Earth with the sky seem to play a significant role. About 80% of UFO appearances were of a nocturnal nature. At night time when a section of the Earth faces the dark sky, the number of UFO reports tend to proliferate (Saunders, 1976). The daytime period is usually low in UFO sightings and does not contribute any significant number of UFO reports. The lowest number of UFOs seen is usually at noon. On the monthly basis, most UFO sightings were found during the second half of the year. Concentrations of UFO sightings were usually during the months of August to November. Three of the largest UFO waves recorded had their peak in October (France 1954, USA 1973 and Russia 1989-1990). About once a year, UFOs sightings would spike when a UFO wave occurred somewhere on Earth. On average it was observed that there is one major UFO wave or a cluster of UFO sightings in a certain geographical region each year. The peaking or influx of UFO appearances was notable as early as 1883. It was only in 1896 that the events were being properly documented. Between 1896 until 2000, the yearly occurrences have been consistent at a rate of about one a year. This gives the UFO waves a mean 10-year cycle around the Earth (Jamaludin, 1979) 12 However after the year 2000, the occurrences of UFO waves took a different form. There were no more major clusters of reports, but the manifestation had split into several smaller pockets of activities across the globe. These UFO events allowed the phenomenon to manifest over a wider area. The yearly statistics of UFO sightings has significantly increased over the years. This trend indicates that the UFO events are progressively on the rise. This could be due either to the increased awareness of the public and availability of better reporting methods, or the phenomenon itself is finding it easier to manifest. All Condition Capability UFOs can operate in space, in our atmosphere and in water. Numerous cases were documented where UFOs were seen diving into lakes and oceans. And they were also sighted popping out of the water and ascending into the sky. Ships plying the oceans at night have on numerous occasions reported seeing wheels of light moving in the waters. In the past these incidents were documented in the ship’s logs and they are still reported in the modern era. Some of these lights or objects actually came out of the ocean and ascended into the sky. They behaved not only like submarines, but as flying objects as well, and once they have left our atmosphere they transform into spacecraft! UFOs have also been sighted in space. Astronomers have reported seeing UFOs on numerous occasions flying close to the Moon and strange flying objects have been photographed in space by astronauts. So UFOs are not solely an earthly phenomenon. And they are not earthquake lights either. The capabilities of UFOs to operate with ease in these different environments i.e. in air, water and vacuum appears to coincide with their smooth shape, lack of wings, propellers or any observable engine nacelles or compartments. UFO Formation or Flight Arrangement Most UFO sightings describe just one object, but at times there could be two, three or more of them. However during periods of intense UFO activity for example during a flap or UFO wave, they appear in large formations. Sometimes just one formation is seen, but at times there was more than that, with one formation following the other on the same route at predetermined intervals. The number of objects in the formations varies from three to over ten. The most common formation adopted by the UFOs is the V-shape or boomerang-like 13 arrangement. Occasionally they fly in tandem. Most of the formation flying occurs at altitudes of over 5000 feet; no large UFO formation has been reported flying at tree-top level. Large numbers of UFOs flying in loose formation, but clustered together as a group is also a common sight. Operational Altitude It has been observed that large-sized objects usually appeared or flew at a higher altitude when compared to the smaller objects. Occasionally these smaller objects were seen to be coming out of the larger mother ship type crafts. All landings were performed by the smaller sized objects. UFOs sometimes operate at high speed and at high altitudes. However, at low altitude, usually below 2000 ft., they usually move at a leisurely pace from slow to normal aircraft speed. Duration of Events UFOs manifestations average between 5 to 20 minutes. This shows that UFOs are not able to sustain long duration time-on-station capability. While UFO manifestations are limited in time, they appear to be deprived of a free choice of space. They seem to operate or are being ordered to appear along straight line corridors (Michel 1958). UFO appearances on Earth are significantly governed by the space and time factor. If we could identify this factor, the UFO mystery could be solved! UFOs that were sighted on numerous occasions on three consecutive nights for example, need to break their time-on-station about every 24 hours. This means that if they appeared over area ‘A’, for, say, 20 minutes, the manifestation needs to stop for 24 hours to allow a second appearance in the same spot of the sky. The same would happen on the third night. This 3-day consecutive appearance over the same location is a common occurrence around the world. This is an important indication that “something” is regulating the UFO appearances on Earth and is not the choice of the UFOs itself. What this regulator could possibly be will be discussed later. Sound One of the most notable characteristics of these flying objects were that they are mainly silent in nature. But occasionally at close quarters a low buzzing or humming sound could be heard. The undeniable fact is that UFOs are silent 14 flying objects which could be directly related to the nature of their propulsion system. As the object itself does not use propellers of any kind or any form of a jet engine, it is not surprising that it does not generate any sound. If these unknown flying objects work using some form of electromagnetic propulsion system, then the low humming or buzzing sound heard when standing close to it, would seem to support such an assumption. Even though UFOs generate no detectable noise, their presence in forested areas usually nullifies all sounds made by animals and birds, or any other sounds associated with these areas at night. Witnesses described an eerie silence, as if time was standing still. Landings When UFOs attempt to land, they sometimes exhibit classic falling-leaf movements. Most landings are performed in a controlled, slow and cautious manner. Taking off on the other hand was initially a slow lift-off and at about less than 50 feet they would suddenly accelerate to a tremendous speed and vanish into the night sky within seconds. Sounds like buzzing or humming could be heard during take offs. In the landing process, the smooth-bodied UFO extends some form of landing gear, which could either be half-ball shaped, or in the form of traditional rodlike legs. When these anomalous objects land on the ground, they dispatch some strange-looking entities, which could be either human-like, robotic or animal in nature. The landings are usually of a short duration. If they are interrupted by human witnesses approaching to have a closer look, the landings are abandoned. This phenomenon appears to be very sensitive to the presence of humans. The activities observed on the part of the UFO occupants during these types of landing, were mainly specimen gathering, such as taking samples of rock, water and small plants. In some instances they were seen to be planting something in the ground. There were also reports of the UFO beings taking away small animals such as cats, dogs and poultry. For larger animals, the phenomenon appears to use a type of light-beam to transport the animals directly into the underside of the hovering object. 15 There are also instances where the landing was of a technical nature i.e. either to inspect the craft’s exterior, or to perform a repair. Sometimes these repairs were carried out in midair, and usually at a low altitude. As if intelligently controlled, human witnesses getting too close to the landed UFO were warned off by a shot of intense, paralyzing light. This type of light resulted in temporary paralysis, causing the witness not being able to move. Some landings were associated with the abduction of humans. If it was not an abduction event, UFO beings would just approach the humans to have a short unimportant conversation, or extend a friendly invitation to board the landed craft. Humanoid Beings Associated with UFOs The humanoid beings or UFO occupants come in various shape and sizes. The smallest beings measure about 2 inches in height and were mainly sighted in Malaysia before the year 1999. After that period, no such tiny beings were seen or reported again. Humanoid beings can be classed into 6 groups (Jamaludin, 2011) i.e.“Giant” measuring over 9ft tall, “Tall” of between 6.5 to 8.5ft in height, “Normal” (56ft), “Small”, usually 3-4.5 ft tall, “Little”, these entities were in the range of 1.5 to 2.5 ft tall and the last group, “Tiny”, which measured under 1ft in height. Giant sized UFO related beings were sighted mainly in Argentina and Israel and at the other end of the height spectrum, were the tiny beings that appeared in Malaysia. The most common group are the “Small” category, which are sighted in many parts of the world. Type of Communication The means of communication initiated by UFO beings could either be telepathic, or use sign language, spoke in their unintelligible language using a voice translating device or they spoke in the local language (Jamaludin, 2011). Fifty percent of the communications were telepathic in nature and in another 26 percent the humanoids spoke in the local language. In a few instances they spoke in a local dialect which was no longer used, which indicated that they were at the correct location, but in the wrong time frame. This could happen as a result of time dilation involving a long space flight. 16 Interaction with Aircraft In the air, UFOs were seen following commercial aircraft, as if they were aware that these are a harmless form of flying machine. But for military aircraft they gave a different response. There have been countless instances of fighter aircraft intercepting these unidentified flying objects to no avail. In all instances, the UFOs would out-pace or out-manoeuver the jets. UFOs appeared to have a mind of their own. They know what to do when chased or intercepted by military jets. It has not been possible for any military jet interceptors to get close enough to identify these unknown flying objects. Some of the attempted interception have resulted in the death of the pilots and the destruction of the aircraft such as the 1948 Mantel incident, the 1953 Kinross AFB case and possibly many more that were kept secret by the military. Response to Military Interception There has been many documented attempts made by airforce planes around the world to intercept and identify unknown flying objects which were initially detected by ground radar stations. The intercepting fighters later visually confirmed the presence of the unknown flying object. The object also appeared on their onboard radar. In such situations, it was a triple positive confirmation of its presence in the sky. While all these events indicated the positive presence of UFOs, the use of another detection element, the gun camera, further confirmed the existence of these objects. From the few incidents that were made known to the public, guncamera footage showed the presence of unknown flying objects in our skies. The notion that UFOs only exist in the mind of the witness could be laid to rest as military responses to UFO appearances showed that their presence was confirmed visually and also by equipment such as radar and cameras. Those involved in these cases were highly trained both technically and mentally, so there are no room for delusions. Physical Effects The physical effects of a UFO interacting with the environment could be clearly seen in landing cases where a depression was left in the ground by the UFO after it had taken off (Phillips, 1975). This ground trace could be due to the marks left by its landing gear. 17 In most instances, it would leave burn marks on the ground, probably due to the heat that it generated. In such cases it would take years for the vegetation to grow back. If there were small plants near the landing site, broken twigs were often discernable. Another observed mark on the ground where a UFO had touched down on tall grass, was the swirling effect it had on the grass. This has been popularly called a ‘UFO nest’. The grass was curled or swirled in the direction of the rotation of the UFO’s body. For these cases, no excessive heat was involved. For some other cases, on close examination the plant stalks appeared to bend due to microwave type of radiation. Animals are very sensitive to UFO landing sites. In most cases they refused or avoided getting close to it. It appeared that animals could sense something at the landing sites which humans cannot. Beside the environment, humans also suffered some form of physical effect due to their close proximity to UFOs. The most commonly reported effects were paralysis, unconsciousness or blackouts, amnesia or memory loss, burn marks on the body, nausea, heat sensation, electric shock, a prickling or tingling sensation, eye irritation, headaches etc.(Jamaludin 2011). The physical effects reported in cases involving abduction claims usually involved some missing time, amnesia or memory loss, feeling dazed, thirsty and some form of physical marks on the body. All of the reported physical effects on the ground and those experienced by humans have remained unchanged over the years. It is a consistent pattern induced by a consistent phenomenon. However there have been no official attempts to document medical cases involving human interaction with UFOs. Caught on Camera and Radar The fact that UFOs can be caught on camera and detected on radar shows us that they are solid physical objects and do not just exist in the minds of the witnesses. Radars can detect any solid object that is present or flying in the sky. A positive radar return on the screen is a positive indication to the presence of a solid body in the atmosphere. Radar returns can measure speed, height and heading as well. This fact is enough to support the objective reality of the existence of UFOs. 18 Anomalous Animal Behavior Animals can respond excitedly or show strange and abnormal behavior as a result of the appearance of UFOs. On top of the list are dogs, which are very responsive to any intruder, be it human or otherwise. Most dogs would bark ferociously but then scurry away in fright and appear to be badly shaken or disturbed by the appearance of UFOs. As we know, animals could hear low frequency forms of electromagnetic energy emission which a human’s ears cannot pick up. These responses are therefore the direct result of stimulus from an unknown outside source. This again points directly to the objective reality of the phenomenon. Horses, cattle, goats, sheep, poultry and cats too are perturbed by the appearances of this strange phenomenon. They all behave as if they are in a state of fright and panic. Something is causing them to behave in such a manner. It cannot be purely subjective when the stimulating source, perhaps an unknown lighted object, is also seen by humans who are present. Most human witnesses are also scared just like the animals, but not to the extent of going berserk. Flying helicopters and planes do not scare animals unless they fly too close and make them feel threatened. The threat is usually from the noise made by the aircraft. But for UFOs the disturbance is generated, possibly by the low vibrating electromagnetic energy emanating from them. UFOs are silent flying objects. By rights, animals should not be upset by their appearance, as it is a harmless form of flying machine. Even at a distance of over 500ft, animals are badly shaken by their appearance. These objects must be giving out some form of energy, presumably in the ultralow electromagnetic frequency (ULF) range. The animal’s erratic behaviour only returns to normal when these objects departed from the area. Some dogs even remain in a stupor long after the UFO had gone. All animal reactions documented across the world appear to show the same response. At UFO landing sites, even when the UFO has gone, animals are scared to be in close proximity to the landing site for a period of about a week or more. UFO Crashes Even though UFOs present themselves as gravity-defying and technologically advanced flying machines, occasionally these objects are reportedly seen to crash. On many occasions, the occupants of UFOs seem to be engaged 19 in repairing the flying objects. One good example was the Boianai sightings in Papua, New Guinea in 1959. In this incident the repairs were done in mid-air. Many other reports describe UFO landings being made apparently for the purpose of checking or inspecting the body of the craft. This indicates that UFOs are manufactured flying objects prone to suffering structural failures, even with the support of advance technology. Crashed UFOs present us with much-needed physical evidence as proof of their existence. Unfortunately, all of the crashed reports either in the United States or elsewhere are kept secret (presumably to prevent mass panic). The two most significant crash episodes were recorded in 1947 at Roswell, New Mexico in the United States and at Varginha in Brazil in 1996. Leonard Stringfield has dedicated his life to searching for and documenting reports of alleged UFO crashes and the retrieval of alien bodies. Unfortunately none of these reports can be confirmed or validated. *** 20 Chapter 2 Facts About Earthquakes Earthquakes are known natural events. Since they relate to ground stress and movement, all studies are focused primarily on the ground. However some studies were carried out to see whether sunspots and solar flares might have triggered earthquakes. In trying to fathom the nature of earthquakes, it has given rise to the theory of Plate Tectonics and later on, the underlying concept of continental drift. Observations of the sea bed spreading and moving eventually validates the theory. These theories served as the foundation for understanding earthquakes. Yet, somehow, earthquake prediction still remained elusive. So are these theories correct, or are we missing something? Even with the two theories combined, they still fail to produce a formula or provide solid empirical evidence to successfully predict earthquakes. Something is certainly not in sync. As the saying goes – a valid theory makes valid predictions. Two good theories into one still do not make a right. It appears as if the dynamic to trigger earthquakes is still unaccounted for, or part of the equation is missing. Any earth tremors, either big or small, as the theory stipulates, are attributed to the movement of these plates, either from the few, main, large tectonic plates, or the many smaller faults scattered across the globe. The fault lines or ground fractures mark the boundaries where these plates meet. So essentially all the plates move along with the continental drift concept. However, in reality the movements due to continental drift are either zero or just a few millimeters annually. A stimuli or a push is needed to cause an earthquake. And to cause a major event an even greater push is needed. So when two tectonic plates collide or ‘rub’ each other, earthquakes occur. This however will not have an instantaneous effect. When plates came into contact, the rocks interlock into each other and slip, slide or break. This process usually takes years to happen. In another scenario, when one plate slides over another one, a process called subduction, a major quake will jolt the Earth. A major quake often causes 21 hundreds of minor tremors called aftershocks which are localized around the main shock epicenter and persist for a period of time. A major quake with its epicenter in the ocean bed can generate tsunamis, adding to its destructive power. The 2004 Sumatran earthquake in Indonesia wiped out over 200,000 souls in just a matter of minutes. Depending on the magnitude of the main shock, aftershocks usually die down within weeks. In some instances, before a major quake strikes an area, several tremors are felt nearby, these are known as ‘foreshocks’. Seismologists study foreshock events and other ground parameters. These include the appearance of increased radon (a colourless, odourless radioactive gas) counts in wells, geomagnetic anomalies, anomalous animal behaviour and other phenomena in an attempt to understand the precursors or indicators of the next earthquake. There has been, however, one successful prediction based on such studies as demonstrated in the 1975 Haichang earthquake in China. This success however has not been duplicated elsewhere. The use of earthquake precursors in forecasting earthquakes does not seem to be valid. In fact the concept is controversial with no solid basis on which to formulate a prediction theorem. The observations on earthquake precursors and the use of sophisticated equipment and satellite technology does not appear to throw any light on what is actually triggering the earthquakes. The dynamics of ground movements were too slow for any significant effects in the short term observations. When rock surfaces interlocked with each other, as generally accepted, it usually took years before the slip occurred and earthquakes happened. The occurrence of a big quake is like a freight train hitting a building. We need to look for this freight train, or more precisely the force that provided the impetus for it to uncontrollably jerk forward! Knowing the drift or movements of the plates is not enough to make any successful prediction of the where and when an earthquake will strike. There appears to be a missing link between the plate movements and the ensuing earthquakes. Only a valid and testable theory can rectify the problem. On the whole, most scientists held to the notion that it is almost impossible to predict or forecast any impending earthquake. There appear to be many undetermined factors at play in the Earth’s mantle. 22 While the theory about earthquakes is an established and well accepted one, there is, however, still no definitive answer for a successful earthquake prediction. Let us take a look at some of the facts about earthquakes. Time of Day A study carried out by Micheal Shimshoni (1971) shows that earthquakes are more common during the night time. Critics however pointed out that this could be due to the lack of sound disturbances during the night and hence the better detection. But simply said, any tremors of magnitude 4.0 and above can be clearly detected and recorded at any time of the day regardless of any man-made sounds or ground disturbances present. So the claim that earth tremors are much more frequent at night when compared to daytime appears to be valid. When discussing UFO appearances which are shown to be much higher during the night when compared to the daylight hours, then the above observation is very relevant if we consider the possibility that UFOs and earthquakes could somehow be sharing a common stimulus. Location of Earthquakes Earthquakes as we know usually occur at fault lines. Some earth tremors, however, strike at abnormal areas where there are no known fault lines. Most quakes were usually concentrated along the great fault line or earthquake belt spanning the globe, this is known as the ‘Ring of Fire’. Isolated earth tremors are usually located along local fault lines. The location underground where an earthquake happens is called the hypocenter, but on the surface it is known as the epicentre. The epicentre of an earthquake is determined by triangulation from the readings made by at least three seismological stations. This is based on the calculations derived from the arrival times of the P and S waves generated by the quake. Each seismograph at the stations records the times when the first (P waves) and second (S waves) seismic waves that arrive. Knowing how fast the waves travel can be used to calculate the distance from the epicentre to each seismograph. Circles are drawn around the seismograph locations and the epicentre is calculated where the three circles intersect. Seismic waves occur in two forms i.e. compressional longitudinal waves in the ground and shear transverse waves which travel on the surface. The waves traverse the body of the Earth, with the primary one being the fastest, 23 (called P-waves),while the slower secondary one is known as S-for secondary or Shear waves. How Earthquakes Occur The Earth has four major layers with the lowest one, the inner core, consisting of two parts, solid and liquid. The Earth’s mantle sits on the liquid core layer.The mantle itself is mainly molten lava. This causes the uppermost crustal layer, which comprises hard rocks and consists of many plates, to experience slight movements due to its unstable position on the mantle, which occasionally results in collisions and abrasions between the plates. This in turn causes ruptures in the ground. The release of energy due to these ruptures produces ground oscillations called earthquakes. Earthquakes can occur in several ways, either because of the collision of two plates face-to-face, or one plate sliding over the other, or it could be the sideways abrasion at the plate boundaries. In the case of one plate slipping down or moving underneath another plate, this is called subduction, if it happened in the seabed this could generate a tsunami as a result of such a large body of water being displaced. Magnitude of Earthquakes Earthquakes occur in varying magnitudes from small (below 2.5) to large (above 8.0). Its intensity varies from location to location. The earthquake magnitude refers to the intensity of the tremor, or if measured in numbers, as it relative size. The intensity of an earthquake is measured on the Richter Scale. A seismometer is used to measure the magnitude of an earthquake. This meter produces a graph which showed how powerful each earthquake is. The Richter scale is numbered 1 to 10. It is logarithmic in nature which means a quake measuring magnitude 6 is ten times more powerful than a magnitude 5 tremor. The Richter scale, however, is not accurate when measuring powerful earthquakes. The Moment Magnitude Scale was developed to overcome this. This scale is based on the ‘total moment release’ of the earthquakes energy and it works over a wide range of earthquake magnitudes. Moment is a product of the distance a fault moves and the force required to move it. Moment magnitude estimates are about the same as Richter magnitudes 24 for small to large earthquakes. But only the moment magnitude scale is capable of measuring magnitude 8.0 and greater quakes more accurately Frequency of Earthquakes The National Earthquake Information Center (NEIC) in the United States records about 20,000 earthquakes of magnitude 2.5 or greater each year and with a mean of about 55 tremors per day. This would translate about 2 quakes per hour. This figure, however, could just be reflecting to the scenario in NEIC data only. There are many more worldwide tremors of magnitude below 3.5, which are not reported or documented by NEIC. A look at the global earthquake occurrences on a 24-hour period gives a different picture. There appears to be an earth tremor about once in every 5-10 minutes time frame. This is due to the fact that there are a considerable number of earth tremor measuring less than 3.0 occurring constantly as a result of local seismic stress. For large earthquakes measuring 8.0 or greater, between 2004 and 2014 there were 18 quakes worldwide according to a report to the annual meeting of the Geological Society of America in October 2014. This would give an average of 1.8 big earthquakes per year. Occasionally two such mega-quakes occur in the same year. This, however, is quite rare. The behavior of earthquakes are that small or low magnitude quakes are common on an hourly basis, but large major tremors measuring 7.9 or greater only occur about twice per year. There seems to be a hidden mechanism or law which governs or dictates that big earthquakes do not occur as regularly as the smaller ones. What ground dynamics dictate that mega-quakes only happen about once or twice a year? Here lies an interesting clue to the mystery of earthquakes! Theoretically, for earthquakes to happen it would take an external force to cause the interlocking rocks to give way or break under stress in a short span of time. This external force is the deciding factor whether the intensity of the tremors are small or large and the where and when the next major quake will occur. Animals can sense an impending earthquake. The few successful earthquake predictions made in China rely in part on the observation of abnormal animal behaviors before an earthquake. Animals are known to be magnetoreceptive to ultra-low frequency (ULF), and extremely 25 Low frequency (ELF) electromagnetic waves form on the surface of the Earth while the seismic-geological process is building up in the ground. It is believed that ULF and ELF electromagnetic waves could also be the cause for air ionization, water oxidation and possible water toxination which are believed to cause abnormal reactions to animals. Among the observed strange behaviours exhibited by animals or mammals are catfish moving violently, chickens that stop laying eggs and bees leaving their hive in a panic. Many pet owners claim that their cats and dogs act strangely before an earthquake and bark or whine for no apparent reason, or show signs of nervousness and restlessness. Earthquake Cycles There were no observable periodicities in earthquake recurrences for any minor or major earth upheavals around the globe. Earthquakes as a whole do not occur in cycles or come with clock-like precision like meteor showers. However, there were some isolated observations that at certain locales, it appears that big earthquakes do return to some areas about once every 10 years as was seen in Ethiopia and southwest Japan, where the Philippine Sea Plate slid down the Eurasian Plate at the Nankai Trough (Ando 1975). In another study, taking into account earthquakes that caused significant damage in Japan over a 200-year period, the average recurrence interval for shallow inland earthquakes in Japan is 10 years (Understanding Earthquakes by the Headquarters for Earthquake Research Promotion, Japan, March 2014) There have also been observations of a 10-year recurrence time between two major earthquakes affecting the same fault segment in the United States (Martin Vallée & Claudio Satriano 2014). The Arizona Seismic Belt, according to a geologist at Arizona State University’s School of Earth and Space Exploration, swoops diagonally from the northwest near St. George, Utah, through Tonto National Forest and east toward New Mexico, earth tremors with magnitudes in the 3 to 5 range occur roughly every 10 years, mostly in the north. Take note that these 10-year cycles of seismic events seem to conform to other geomagnetic events on Earth and the Sun. UFO waves also follow this 10-year time period. There appears to be a common underlying stimulus to these events. 26 Spatial Distribution of Earthquakes Earthquakes are not randomly distributed across the Earth but occur in distinct areas where the plate boundaries meet. In other words, for an earthquake to happen, there must be a fault line present. This is where the rupture happened and the ground oscillations occurred. But there are a few instances where earthquakes occur in an abnormal area with no known fault line present. Earthquakes also appeared to be oriented either in a northeast-southwest line or northwest-southeast direction. G. MacCarthy from the Department of Geology and Geography at University of North Carolina observed that earthquake data from 1885 till 1956 showed that at least eleven earthquakes were aligned in an almost perfectly straight line in a north-eastern direction across western North Carolina and up into Virginia (MacCarthy 1956). If we look at the daily occurrences of global earthquakes and using the Equator as the reference line, we can see how tremors occur. Say for example the first quake of the day occurs in the northern hemisphere, the next quake will usually strike the southern hemisphere. Then it will change back to the northern hemisphere. This cycle repeats over and over again into the next day, month and year (Ahmad Jamaludin, Handbook on How to Predict Earthquakes, 2019). This monotonous process is only broken occasionally with the occurrence of another quake close to the earlier tremor, either as a twin or double quake. This cycle can also be interrupted when a series of aftershocks dominate a local region. Overall 80 % of the spatial distribution of global tremors conformed to this type of north-south and back to south-north orientation. Continental drift effects cannot make these quick spatial distribution changes in earthquakes. Nature of Earthquakes Earth tremors usually strike as individual isolated events somewhere on the main or local fault lines. Generally, earth tremors of magnitude 2.5 or more strike once every 5-10 minutes somewhere on Earth. In between this time frame, there could be numerous other tremors of magnitude less than 2.5. Most of the low intensity tremor are not felt or registered. There are on average an estimated 16 major seismic quakes recorded each year. Fifteen of these quakes measure in the range of 7.0 or more. Only one of them is in the 8.0 category. A big quake usually occurs along with numerous aftershocks. 27 Other forms of earthquakes are the twin and double tremors. A double earthquake is the result of successive impulses; a twin-earthquake is due to a single generative effect. Twin earthquakes can strike within minutes of each other on the same fault line and at about the same location. Double earthquakes, sometimes called doublet or multiplet earthquakes, have nearly identical waveforms originating from the same location. They are characterized as single earthquakes having two or more main shocks of similar magnitude, sometimes occurring within tens of seconds of each other. It is quite rare to see two earthquakes of magnitude greater than 4.0 and with a distance of over 100 km or more, strike at precisely the same time on another unrelated fault line. Considering the sheer number of earthquakes occurring around the globe each day, it is statistically abnormal not to find widely separated tremors coinciding with each other at the very same moment. There is another type of earth tremor known as an ‘earthquake swarm’. These are very low-intensity quakes confined or clustered in a small geographical region. The nature of earthquake swarm, to use an analogy, is as if the Earth was experiencing a ‘prickling sensation’. Earthquake swarms usually last for a short period of time, ranging from days to weeks. Some sources used this kind of seismic activity to forecast an impending major quake. However no reliable formula could be found. Unlike aftershocks which, just like earthquake swarm, cluster in a localized area, earthquake swarms are not related to any main shock. They were triggered using a different kind of seismic dynamic. Many believe that it is the presence of underground water that triggers the swarm. Earthquake Lights It should be noted that earthquake lights and luminous glowing UFOs are two different phenomena (see comparison in Table 1 below). While UFOs are solidlooking objects and move in a controlled manner, earthquake lights were just luminous lights in the form of a ball, or it could look like a mist or vapor, which of course lacks structure and maneuverability. But in some cases they can appear like ball lightning. These small balls of light can move low over the ground but they have a short life-span. They do not suddenly accelerate into the higher atmosphere. These luminous balls do not move in a structured manner. 28 How earthquake lights, sometimes called Earth Lights, form is not yet fully understood. But the possibility exists that they may be associated with the seismic ground stresses on quartz bearing rocks. The only thing both earthquake lights and UFOs have in common are their glowing nature, colorful lights and short life span. Table 1. Comparison Between UFOs and Earthquake Lights (EQLs) Nature Shape Size of Orbs Peak Time Mean Duration UFOs Structured, sometimes with dome, windows, antennas Small to Large 8–10 pm 5-20 minutes Association with Fault Could appear 500 km Line away Appearance Days Before, During & After Quake Origin Mostly from the sky Formation Colour Nature of Light Height Body Rotation Lateral Movement Type of Flight Body Separation Structured flight formation – V-shaped, boomerang Daytime – Grey or white Nightime- Dark form, single or multicolored lights Luminous, flickering, pulsating From ground level to over 30,000 ft in altitude Slow or no rotation Ascend, descend & Level Flight Controlled Split or Release smaller lights 29 Earthquake Lights Orbs, Sheet lightning, Steady glow or Mist-like Small None Less than 1 minute for orbs. Several minutes for glows or sheet lightning Near or close to fault line Short time Before & During Earthquake only Originate from the ground Loose formation Single colour for orbs, multicoloured for mistlike Flashes, Luminous glow, Lightning-like Close to ground below 1000 ft altitude No rotation Ascend or stationary Wandering or wavering Does not split or divide itself Speed Sound Movement Human Presence Humanoid Presence Abduction Termination Slow to high speed Buzzing or Humming Can Change Direction Avoid Humans Occasionally Occasionally Flew away out of sight Slow or stationary None Usually One Direction No Response None None Dissipate or Extinguished itself Detection of ultra-low-frequency (ULF) electromagnetic emissions There were recorded observations of specific, ultra-low-frequency (ULF) electromagnetic emissions before and after the large Loma Prieta earthquake in the United States and the large Spitak earthquake in the former USSR (Masashi Hayakawa, 2009). This showed the presence of ULF electromagnetic energy which was attributed or suspected to originate from the ground. The presence of ultra-low frequency electromagnetic emissions in seismic areas is an integral part of earthquake propagation. It remains to be determined whether these ULF emissions are from the geophysical process in the ground or induced from a source in the sky. Take note that animals sense the same type of electromagnetic emission during UFO appearances. Earthquakes and Celestial Bodies The Solar Cycle seem to have an influence on earthquakes based on statistical analysis carried out by Tavares & Azevedo (2011). In certain regions it was noted there was an increase in earthquake events during Solar Cycle Maxima. But during Solar Minima the opposite was the case as there was a decline in the number of tremors recorded. A study by Vito Marchitelli et al (July 2020) found a clear correlation between proton density due to solar activity and the occurrence of global seismicity. A strong significant correlation seems to exist between worldwide earthquakes and solar events. John Gribbin and Stephen Plagemann in their book – The Jupiter Effect (1974) predicted that an alignment of the planets of the Solar System would create a great earthquake on the San Andreas Fault in 1982. However it did not happen, even though Jupiter is 300 times more massive than the Earth. Regarding astrophysical objects, it is still unknown whether any celestial objects or other astronomical bodies such as Black Holes can induce earthquakes. 30 While earthquakes on Earth are attributed to tectonic plates and their continental drifts effect, rocks on the Moon or Mars while not sitting on any viscous mantle, also suffer tremors. This is an indication that either the dynamics of tremors on the Moon and Mars were different or they could be induced by a common external denominator. *** 31 Chapter 3 Comparison Between UFOs & Earthquakes The UFO Phenomenon and earthquakes are two separate and non-identical events. One relates to unidentified anomalous flying objects associated with the sky, while the other relates to violent geophysical ground movements. One subject, UFOs, was neglected by mainstream media, scientists and world governments as an unimportant and insignificant event in the paranormal realm. The other, earthquakes, causes major concern as it involves loss of life and destruction to economic infra-structure. One appears to be more important than the other, but in the search for answers both are equally important to science. Let us compare the two phenomena to see if they share some similarities. Location UFO manifestations and the occurrence of earthquakes are both located in seismic areas. There are more documented UFO sightings made in earthquake prone areas than in locations outside these zones. Persinger and Lefreneiri (1977) showed that 70 % of UFO sightings are made in seismic zones. This demonstrates that the manifestation of UFOs could either be subjective in nature as postulated by the authors, or the UFO phenomenon has an objective origin. Time of Day The analysis by Shimshoni (1971), regarding when earthquakes most often occurred showed that they are much more frequent during the night. Another study by Jinlai Hao et al. (2019) provided further evidence for the diurnal periodicity of earthquakes. UFOs sightings too, based on worldwide sightings, are significantly higher at night than during the day. This is a global observation on the likelihood of UFOs appearing during the night. Many studies on the hourly distribution of UFO sightings around the globe showed that there were two peaks during a 24-hour period, one at around 832 10pm and the second lower peak at 3-4 am. The least likely time to see UFOs is usually around noon. Both earth tremors and UFO manifestations appeared most frequently at night or during nocturnal hours. Only a common mechanism or stimulus can make both events share the same trend. It appears that when a section of the Earth faces the night sky, earthquakes and UFO events seem to proliferate. In other words, something that is present in the night sky may contribute to both the UFO phenomenon and earthquakes. Yearly Distribution While UFOs and earthquakes are randomly distributed in seismic areas, about one to two major clusters of UFO sightings occur somewhere on Earth each year. The same applies to major or large earthquakes. There are only one or two such large magnitude earthquakes recorded each year. Major UFO waves and large earthquakes (measuring 8.0 or greater) seem to share the same level of intensity at least once a year. However, both of them do not occur concurrently in the same region at the same time. Observed Trends UFO sightings over the years based on records of the past till the present show a steady yearly increase in their numbers. Earthquakes over the same time-frame demonstrate the same trend. For UFO sightings it can be argued that the present day, because of better systems of reporting using various media platforms, was responsible for the increase. In seismology, the increased number of earthquakes could be attributed to the number of seismological stations being set up. The actual situation, however, does support both assumptions. Global UFO sightings have been observed to be generally on the increase. There were ups and downs seen in the yearly distribution of UFO reports worldwide. But the overall picture does not suggest that it is decreasing. Take for example 2017 when NUFORC data showed a decline in UFO reports primarily in the United States, its neighbour, Canada reported a surge in cases. Canadians, according to a survey reported sighting UFOs three times each day. The number of UFO sightings recorded in Canada then dropped again in 2019, but somehow shot back up again by about 10 % in 2020. 33 Figure 1: UFO Sighting Reports in NUFORC Database 1990 – 2020 10000 9000 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 No of Report UFO Reports in the United States: 1990 - 2020 Year The National UFO Reporting Center (NUFORC) in the United States was created in 1974. The data for the period 1990-2004 was very low, until suddenly there was an abnormal jump in the dataset for the events starting from 2006. This, however, does not reflect the actual UFO situation in the United States, but is probably due to a glitch in NUFORC’s data collection and documentation process. While a tiny fraction of NUFORC’s data was from outside the United States, the overall picture in the United States was that in the long run the number of UFO sighting reports showed a steady increase. Figure 2: UFO Sighting Reports in Southeast Asia 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 No of Report UFO Reports in Southeast Asia 1990 - 2020 Year 34 Let us take a look at the UFO scenario in Southeast Asia. It could be used as a comparison to compare the nature of reports from the other side of the world during the same time period. Reports were from Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Vietnam, Cambodia and Myanmar. UFO sighting reports from Southeast Asia showed a steady increase from 1990 until 2017, when there was a sudden dip during 2018. This same drop was also noticeable in the NUFORC data. The number of UFO sighting reports in Southeast Asia continued to remain low in 2019 and 2020. Comparing the United States and Southeast Asia data, indicated a significant sudden drop in UFO sighting reports in 2018. No explanation could be offered for this effect. The only interesting celestial observation during this time period was the decrease in the number of sunspots. If UFOs and sunspots are somehow related (see Appendix C), then this observed drop is significant. The low number of UFO sighting reports in 2018 to 2020 seems to coincide with the reduction in sunspots. Even studies carried out for global seismic activity seems to mirror to the number of sunspot counts. Sunspot Maxima generate higher earthquake incidence, while Sunspot Minima corresponded with reduced seismic activity. It should be noted that sunspots do not cause UFO reports or earthquakes. There is, however, the possibility of an unknown stimulus which triggered UFO sightings, earthquakes and also sunspots. We have charted the progression of UFO sightings over time. Let us take a look at the profile for earthquakes. Earthquakes of different magnitude however, showed different trends. Take for example magnitude 5 or greater quakes. Between 1999 to 2020, there was a gradual increase from 2003 which peaked in 2011 before dropping to a level of around 1,500 events per year until 2019. It should be noted that in 2011, after five years of surprisingly being quiet, the Sun suddenly erupted and displayed numerous strong flares and waves of charged particles. This seem to coincide with the spike of magnitude 5.0 or greater earthquakes. 35 Figure 3: Earthquakes with Magnitude 5.0 or Greater for the Period 1999 to 2020 Earthquakes M5 or greater: 1999- 2020 No of Earthquakes 3000 2500 2000 1500 1000 500 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 0 Year Figure 4: Earthquakes with Magnitude 4.0 – 4.9 for the Period 2010 to 2020 No ofd Report Earthquakes M4.0 - 4.9: 2010 - 2020 18000 16000 14000 12000 10000 8000 6000 4000 2000 0 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 Year Between 1999 and 2011, there was a notable yearly increase in the number of earthquakes of magnitudes greater than 5.0. After a peak in 2011, the number showed a decline to a low profile similar to 1999. On the other hand, earthquakes measuring 4.0 to 4.9 for the period of 2010 to 2020, showed a normal up and down trend in the yearly counts. Except for a spike in 2014, the number of earthquakes stayed in a range of between 10,000 to 14,000 tremors per year (see Figure 4 above). 36 When both categories of earthquake magnitude were combined, we see a different picture (see Figure 5 below). This shows that, on the whole, the number of earth tremors recorded each year are gradually increasing. Between 1999 and 2009, for an 11 year period, the total number of earthquakes for 1999 stood at around 8000 events. After a sharp increase in 2005, by 2009 the number of seismic events fell back close to the 1999 level. In 2010, the number of earthquakes remained above 12,000 tremors each year until 2020. There is a noticeable increase in the number of earthquakes when compared to the earlier period between 1999 and 2009. Figure 5: Earthquakes with Magnitude 4.0 – 9.9 for the Period 1999 to 2020 20000 18000 16000 14000 12000 10000 8000 6000 4000 2000 0 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 No of Report Earthquakes M4.0 - 9.9: 1999-2020 Year The increase in population density and the increase in the number of seismological stations being built does not enhance or contribute to an increase in the number of earthquakes recorded. Earthquakes are a natural event which is not determined by human factors. The increase in seismic activity is due to natural propagation dynamics. The fact remains that we can see UFO sightings are increasing and so too are earthquakes. The increase is however gradual, so we can expect that there will be no major surge in UFO activity or seismic events in the near future. Mode of Manifestation UFO sightings and the occurrence of earth tremors are both random in nature. However, at times they tend to cluster in a small geographical area for a limited period of time. 37 Clusters of UFO sightings occurred in the form of a UFO wave when many reports are made in a specific area over a certain period of time. A UFO wave can last for several weeks. Clusters of earth tremors, on the other hand, occur in any given area for a specific time period due to the occurrence of a major earthquake. These clusters of earth tremors or aftershocks can last from days to weeks. Earthquakes and UFO events occur in an identical manner and sightings are in a form similar to a burst of energy, either in the ground (with a high magnitude quake) or from the sky (with a sudden high incidence of UFO reports), in a specific geographical area. Surrounding these two events are lesser intensity UFO appearances or low intensity earthquake aftershocks. This suggests that whatever is causing UFO appearances or earthquakes, they occur in the same mode with a peak event followed by the lesser intensity events. As seen in the Malaysian study, UFOs tend to cluster a day before or after an earthquake (see Chapter 11). However, for major UFO waves and large earthquakes, the clusters tend to be separated by greater distances and times, (see Chapter 10). An interesting and significant observation is that major UFO waves and large earthquakes follow the same geographical migration trends regarding latitude for a 11 year period, then take a different path for another 11 years before falling back in line for the next 11 years. UFO waves and large earthquakes therefore seem to synchronize their latitude migration trend every 21-22 years (see Chapter 10). Spatial Orientation Most clusters of UFO sighting reports are oriented either in a general northeastsouthwest line or a northwest - southeast orientation. Clusters of aftershocks are also aligned in a general northeast-southwest line or a northwest - southeast orientation. The most notable fact is that UFO sighting reports over a 24-hour period tend to be aligned in straight lines. This is more evident during a UFO wave where the increased number of reports give a better picture of the existence of these straight lines. Over the years, most of these lines continue to record or attract the appearance of UFOs along this geographical orientation. 38 On some occasions the occurrence of earth tremors over a 24-hour period will show that quakes tend to occur in a straight line. At least three earthquakes in a 24-hour period can be seen to be aligned perfectly along a straight line covering a wide area. As these trends tend to repeat over the months and years, it is highly unlikely that three or four point earthquake epicenters being aligned along a straight line on an unrelated fault line is a coincidence. Intensity of Events The intensity of global UFO waves recorded varies yearly and from region to region. The magnitude of a UFO wave is characterized by the sheer number of sighting reports made, the number of landings and alleged encounters with alienlike beings, the duration of the wave and finally the size of the area being affected. On the other hand, the intensity of an earthquake is determined by the amount of energy being released from the ground. The magnitude of an earthquake is calculated based on the Richter scale. The occurrence of aftershocks is directly proportional to the magnitude of the earthquake. We can expect to have more aftershocks as the magnitude of earthquakes on the Richter scale increases. A low magnitude earth tremor has no aftershock. Abnormal Animal Behaviour Animals show a certain kind of fear and panic when there are UFO manifestation nearby. And animals also exhibit some anomalous behaviour days or hours before an impending earthquake in an area. The strange, abnormal behaviours observed were caused or aggravated by the results from the emission of low frequency electromagnetic waves generated by the rocks under stress before an earthquake happens. Animals can detect these low frequency energy emissions and go into panic mode. The electromagnetic energy emissions from UFOs are also in the same frequency range as those generated by the earth’s crust before an earthquake. So it is not surprising to see that animals respond in a similar abnormal manner for both earthquakes and UFO manifestations. 39 However, for UFO appearances, animals become much more agitated and feel threatened. They show a high degree of abnormalities, such as dogs violently barking, cats exhibiting extreme fear and cattle and horses showing excessive panic. The observed behaviors are probably due to the close proximity of the UFO and the intensity of the electromagnetic emissions from it. Abnormal animal behaviour noted before earthquakes are of a lesser intensity than those exhibited when UFOs are in close proximity. Magnetic Anomalies The presence of UFOs can cause magnetic anomalies in the local environment. This anomaly can be detected by the use of a magnetometer. Other signs of the presence of these magnetic disturbances can be seen in the interruption of radio and television signals, compass needles spinning and most electrical systems or appliances in use at the time being affected. An electrical power outage is a common event. Electromagnetic variations have been observed before and after earthquakes. Geological ground stress before earthquakes also causes local magnetic anomalies. The common denominator for both earthquakes and UFOs is that they induce magnetic disturbances in the surrounding area. Magnetometers can pick up these disturbances and so do animals. It may be unimaginable to most people that UFOs and earthquakes are somehow related. With that in mind, it would make sense to compare the incidence of UFOs and earthquakes to obtain a much clearer overall picture. The table below shows both events. Table 2. Comparison Between UFOs and Earthquakes Nature Hourly Frequency Yearly Frequency Number of events Mode of Distribution Time UFOs On daily basis – all day at various times About 1-2 main clusters Increasing with time Mostly random but at times cluster in the form of waves or flaps Mainly at night 40 Earthquakes On daily basis – all day at various times About 1-2 major quakes Increasing with time Mostly random, but at times cluster in the form of aftershocks and earthquake swarms Mainly at night Location Spatial Orientation Specific focal point Intensity Recurrence Time Abnormal Animal Behaviour Magnetic Anomalies Trend of Event In or near seismic zone Straight Line & See-saw Effect During a wave, several lines intersect at a common locale In seismic zone Straight Line & See-saw effect During aftershocks, several straight lines joining epicenters can intersect at a common point Mainly low but can be Mainly low but can be of various magnitudes of various magnitudes 10-11 year cycle of UFO 10 years observed for waves certain areas Animals displaying Animals showing panic or showing abnormalities in abnormalities in behaviour behaviour Magnetometers can Anomalous Ultra Low detect magnetic Frequency signals anomalies in the observed by groundpresence of UFOs based magnetometers On the rise On the rise A Common Cause? If UFOs and earthquakes are somehow related, this situation is only possible if both events are triggered by the same source and this cause must have the correct type and amount of energy. While earthquakes are terrestrial events, UFOs appear to be extraterrestrial in nature. Their origin possibly lies in an extra-solar coordinate, i.e. from a specific point in the sky! While the burst of energy could be the main driving force that causes tectonic plates to be rammed into one another creating a quake, this same energy force could open up a corridor in space like a highway. For this to happen, two types of energy must be present. One is gravitational and the other electromagnetic. One triggers earthquakes while the other favour the UFO phenomenon. Theoretically, the presence of a compact form of electromagnetism would create the ideal conditions for UFOs to operate in an electromagnetic-gravitational beam. If this is the primary stimulus, we can expect to see UFO appearances on Earth to be distributed along straight lines and in seismic areas. The same should apply in the distribution of earthquakes. 41 If we can find a scientific physical relationship between the two, the outcome would be like killing two birds with one stone – we finally have the answer to the UFO phenomenon and also the actual primary triggering source that results in earthquakes. With that knowledge we can successfully predict where and when earthquakes will strike. The only thing that remains is to accept the reality of the UFO phenomenon! *** 42 Chapter 4 Orthoteny – The Straight Line Mystery The ‘Orthoteny Concept’ is a theory which states that UFO sightings generally occur in a straight line during a certain period of time. Orthoteny was derived from the Greek word which means - to lie in a straight line. It refers to several points or locations on a map being aligned in a straight line. The term ‘orthoteny’ was coined by Aime Michel, a French UFO researcher who discovered the straight line orientation or sighting alignments of UFO appearances during the great 1954 UFO wave in France. His observation was published in a book entitled – Flying Saucers and the Straight Line Mystery in 1958. Other researchers, checking on their own data, also found the presence of the same straight lines in distribution patterns for their local or regional UFO sightings as well. It was shown to exist in Italy, the Iberian Peninsula, the United States and in Latin America. In fact it can be plotted all across the globe. Drs. David Saunders and Jacques Vallee confirmed the existence of the straight line theory by charting great-circle lines over portions of the United States and other countries as well. So here, for the first time in history, in trying to understand the UFO phenomenon we actually have a very significant observation. It was as if the mystery is showing us an important clue to their mode of operation, but unfortunately, due to lack of insight or knowledge, we failed to take advantage of it. The discovery of orthotenic lines initially caused some excitement, but after much discussion among believers and sceptics, and because there was no plausible scientific explanation for its existence, the matter finally died down. Most researchers attributed orthotenic lines to coincidence rather than anything deliberate. Now, almost 66 years later, this subject is presented in this book in its proper perspective. It should be noted that on any given day there were usually only one or two orthotenic lines, because only few UFO sightings were made. During peak period of UFO waves, due to the sheer volume of reports, the number of these 43 straight lines was noticeable, when, during a 24 hour period, they crossed or intersected at a common point. And interestingly, at this point, a large cigarshaped flying object was usually seen. While UFOs appear to operate along straight lines, larger mother ship type UFOs, which were responsible for releasing smaller objects, chose the intersection point to disperse the smaller objects. Why this occurs will become evident as we arrive at a possible explanation. Let’s take an overview at the French orthotenic lines in 1954. The straight line nature during the 1954 UFO wave can be classified into three categories i.e, only one single straight line was observed during a 24-hour period (Figure 6). Figure 6: A Single Dominant Orthotenic Line on September 24, 1954 in France The second category involved several straight lines, but with an ever changing orientation with respect to geographical true north (see figure 7 on next page). 44 Figure 7: A Several Random Orthotenic Lines on September 27-29, 1954 in France The third more interesting category was when several alignments of these straight lines intersected at a common point or foci during a 24-hour period. This would give, when plotted on a map, the impression is that it looks like the spokes of a wheel. This usually happened during the peak period of UFO activity. With more reports, the distribution pattern of UFOs becomes much more discernable (see Figure 8 below). Figure 8: A Several Orthotenic Lines intersected at one common point on October 7, 1954 in France 45 Aime Michel was the first to notice where several straight lines intersect, a larger form of UFO, which he termed a “cloud cigar” was usually present and reported to be hanging motionless in the air. At the same time the huge object was observed to release smaller objects. These smaller, lighted flying objects would depart from their mother ship and venture off along these straight lines possibly heading for several predetermined locations. Later, these discs would return to unite with the huge cloud-shrouded cylindrical or ovoid flying structure, which would then fly away. Michel theorized that the UFOs used the straight lines as a reference grid to perform their surveillance. There is however another explanation for it. The presence of the straight lines indicate that UFOs may not have the operational or flying capabilities to operate outside the straight lines or corridors. However, even though UFOs have the speed and what appears to be advanced technology they seem unable to operate freely. Something is limiting or hindering their freedom of movement. So when several straight lines intersect at a common point, it provides an opportunity for a UFO mother ship to discharge smaller craft to all the radiant, so that it could maximize the limited time available to be at as many locations as possible before the window of opportunity closes. Their manifestations or appearances remained within the straight-line corridors, which seems to be just a few kilometers wide. In other words, UFOs are governed by an important time factor. For this reason, we see that UFOs behave as a transient event. This means that they cannot operate freely in our environment and they do not have the ability to stay for any length of time in a particular area. It appears that they have to adhere to a “regulator” which dictates where and when they appear. If the UFO phenomenon represents the appearance of alien beings from the stars, this could also be the primary reason why there is no “UFO invasion” at present. UFOs operational limitations are similar to the case of conventional trains requiring tracks. Trains cannot operate where there are no tracks present. Trains only travel in areas where there are railway lines available. This shows that UFOs also need ‘tracks’ to operate, which is why they only seem to operate along straight lines. 46 Again we might ask – why are these tracks not curved or bent in certain areas like railway lines? This is a clue that the straight lines are being drawn or created from outside the Earth! Any lines drawn will naturally follow the curvature of the Earth; and in support of this UFOs only manifest along these lines. If UFO tracks or orthotenic lines are artificial in nature, and over the years UFOs planted navigational beacons in the ground, then they should be able to operate freely over any area and not be limited to only travelling in straight lines. But as we can see, in reality UFOs only have one operational mode i.e. moving in straight lines. The presence of orthotenic lines as shown in the 1954 French UFO wave confirm this fact. This observation is suggestive that “something”, not the UFOs itself, is controlling or governing where and when UFOs can appear on Earth. As we proceed through the following chapters, it should become clear what this “something” might be. The only opportunity for UFOs to be present in large numbers on Earth is when the conditions are right. This ideal condition only exists when there are many straight lines criss-crossing a specific location and this is where UFO waves occur. But this ‘ideal condition’ is only transient in nature. We can see that even the occurrence of UFOs waves is limited in time and location. UFOs cannot remain for a long period of time during a wave, but have to leave immediately the conditions becomes unsuitable. This is an indication that orthotenic lines are short-lived and only exist for less than an hour. For this reason we do not often see UFOs remaining in any area for longer than this. The average time is normally between 5 to 20 minutes. Due to this limitation, UFO landings are quite rare, except during an intense UFO wave. Whatever creates the straight lines appears to keep changing its orientation and limits the endurance of a UFO’s operational capabilities in any area to only a few minutes. To use an analogy, strike aircraft that operate from an aircraft carrier have a limited time during which they can strike and can remain in the target area. This will depend on the aircraft operating radius and its fuel capacity. If the aircraft carrier is moving away from the strike area, the time that the aircraft can be in the target area becomes much shorter. The same scenario seems to affect UFOs. But for UFOs it is not their mother ship, but their point of origin that is moving 47 away, perhaps in time, or perhaps orbiting away from Earth. This is an indication that the contributing source of the UFO phenomenon is celestial in nature. The presence of this celestial source would require UFOs to leave before the window of opportunity closed or moved further away. This window is what dictates where and when UFOs can appear. We shall refer to this source or window as Source X. We see that during a wave period, UFOs arrive in force and return in force. No UFOs stay behind. Something is dictating their presence in our environment. We need to identify what this is and whether it is already in our environment (a geophysical location) or is in the sky (a celestial location)? The observations and evidence points to the latter. All of the above observations, provide us clues to the possible existence of some natural geological-cosmological factor which provides the ideal conditions for UFOs to manifest in large numbers and at the same time, the same conditions which limit their duration here on Earth. This will become much clearer when we discuss on the possible existence of ‘Source X’, which is responsible for, not only UFO manifestations, but also the occurrence of earthquakes. The observations give us another clue regarding the nature of UFO propulsion systems. If trains need railway tracks to move, UFOs need the straight paths as a corridor to operate on, which means that the straight path may perhaps provide the electromagnetic medium needed to sustain lift and supply its operational needs. The next question to ask is what is causing or creating this electromagnetic pathway? If UFOs operate along these pathways, then the UFOs themselves could be electromagnetic in nature. Reports of UFO shapes, luminosities and the fact that they cause interference to electrical appliances demonstrate that UFOs utilise electromagnetism as their propulsion system. Magnetic anomalies usually occur at seismic fault lines. Magnetic disturbances are also noticeable before an impending earthquake. We have four elements or indicators here which seem to be tied together, i.e. UFOs, electromagnetism, straight line distribution and earthquakes. With such good pointers, if it was a murder case, any good policeman could easily trace and identify the culprit. In our case, the culprit appears to be in the sky, the same direction that most UFOs seem to be coming from. 48 The most reasonable explanation is that the straight lines are extra-terrestrially induced, which means that the lines are created outside the Earth. To use an analogy, imagine if there was a laser light beam placed on a satellite and it was pointed at Earth. The beam will hit only one point. But if the satellite is rotating, the beam will cut across the face of the Earth, so we will see only one straight line (refer to Figure 9). Figure 9. A non-rotating satellite with a laser beam directed towards Earth. Now imagine if this satellite is not stable and fluctuates up and down, left and right, the straight lines made by the light beam will criss-cross the Earth as shown in Figure 10 below. Figure 10. An unstable rotating satellite with a Laser beam directed at Earth. Now with all of these directional fluctuations, say that the satellite suddenly stabilized itself, but was still in the rotating mode, we can see that on the ground all the straight lines made by the beam will cross or intersect at one common point (see Figure 11 below). 49 The factor which controls all these would depend on the speed of rotation of the satellite and its axis stability. The satellite is more stable at a fast rotation than at a slower pace. Imagine this like a top spinning, it is stable and sits on one point when spinning at a fast rate. But when its speed started to decline, the top starts wobble and its point on the ground executes an erratic, non-circular line. Figure 11. A stable rotating satellite with its Laser beam directed towards Earth. At slow rotational speeds, the light beams striking Earth would be few and crisscross each other at various times of the day. But at high rotational speeds, the satellite stabilizes itself and will result in the light beam being focused at a very specific point on Earth and the straight lines made would naturally cross each other at a common point. This will give the wheel spoke-like line alignments. This is what was observed during UFO waves. The discovery of orthoteny by Aime Michel can be explained if we use the above satellite model. Since we are dealing with UFOs, which could be representations of alien visitors from the heavens, the satellite theory fits all of the observations of orthoteny seen during the 1954 French UFO wave and all other UFO events around the world. However, in reality, the satellite theory is not valid as the satellite would need a considerable amount of self-generated electromagnetic energy to create a straight line flying corridor to Earth. And the satellite needs to be hollow to allow UFOs to pass through it! The satellite theory needs to be replaced by an astrophysical body. Technically it had to be a “hole” in space. In this configuration the source must be a compact mass of energy, possibly a mixture of electromagnetic and gravitational energy. 50 Being in energy form, with massive gravity it could curve space and literally puncture a hole in the space-time continuum. The only known astronomical object that could contribute such massive gravitational energy is a Black Hole. But they are too far away to be of any value or create any significant effects on Earth. Our nearby Sun also emits electromagnetic waves in the form of magnetic storms, but they do not strike Earth in a compact, directional manner like a laser beam. The Sun’s magnetic storms engulf and envelope the whole of the Earth’s atmosphere. Therefore Source X, if it is present, must be of an astrophysical nature. Unfortunately, no scientist has yet discovered or detected any abnormality in the Solar System to indicate or suggest the existence of such an object. But wait! Remember that we have earthquakes, sunspots and UFOs! The present accepted notion is that earthquakes were attributed to the geophysical process in the ground, sunspots to an internal disturbances in the Sun and UFOs, you guess it, its all in our minds! The real surprise to science, however, would be if this hypothetical ‘Source X’ is the culprit that triggers earthquakes, sunspots and also contributes to the presence of the UFO phenomenon in our reality. Orthoteny is therefore one of our biggest assets to understand and identify the stimulus behind the occurrence of UFOs and earthquakes on Earth. *** 51 Chapter 5 Patterns Seen in UFO Waves and Large Earthquakes The UFO phenomenon as we know, during any minor or major wave tends to cluster at a small geographical region. In time the events shift or move to a different area. The phenomenon, even though is a localized event, appears as if it cannot remain in any area for a long period of time. Before ceasing its activities in a particular region, it will migrate to a new location before abruptly disappearing all together. Understanding the occurrence UFO waves, flaps or minor pockets of UFO activity could shed some light on their distribution patterns and limitations. If UFOs represent the arrival of alien spaceships to Earth, the localized nature of its operational capabilities and its limited time-on-station would suggest that they were relying or utilizing some form of natural force to operate in our environment. Finding this natural force could eventually reveal how UFOs operate in our atmosphere. However, if UFOs are sociological or psychological in nature, the space-time pattern observed during mass hallucinations, or other socially induced traumas, can be easily correlated with any socio-political condition or natural disaster prevailing at the time. The occurrence of earthquakes, on the other hand, appears localized at areas where fault lines are located. However, there are times when earthquakes occur in areas with no known fault line or fracture in the ground. While most tremors tend to occur as single, isolated quakes, at times they can cluster at certain areas, especially when a major earthquake occurs. These tremors manifest as foreshocks and aftershocks. To get an insight into the daily distribution of earthquakes, let us take a look at two different situations on two different days. The dates in question are August 7, 2018 and August 19, 2018 when a large earthquake struck the Fiji Islands. 52 This should give us a general picture of how earthquakes behave on a global scale; one on a normal, quiet day and the other an active day, without emphasis on which tectonic plates were involved. Table 3: Number of Global Earthquakes on August 19, 2018 No of Earthquakes 171 39 37 10 4 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Total 287 Region/Area Fiji Island Region Alaska Indonesia Japan Puerto Rico California Papua New Guinea British Virgin Island Russia China Chile US Virgin Islands Costa Rica Solomon Islands Vanuatu Oklahoma New Zealand Southeast Pacific Hawaii Turkey Greece Dominican Republic Italy El-Salvador Owen Fracture Zone Wallis & Futuna Percentage 59.6 13.5 12.9 3.5 1.4 1.0 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 100 On August 19, 2018, a magnitude 8.2 earthquake struck the Fiji Islands. There were 171 recorded aftershocks on that day. To a lesser extent, there were two separate pockets of seismic activity in Alaska and Indonesia. Other parts of the world received only the daily average. Looking back 12 days earlier, on August 7, 2018, the global seismic situation was quieter with earthquake intensity 53 remaining below magnitude 5.0. Total number of tremors for the day was 62 (see Table 4 below). Table 4: Number of Global Earthquakes on August 7, 2018 No of Earthquakes 13 8 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Total 62 Region/Area Alaska Indonesia Tonga Oklahoma Papua New Guinea Russia Fiji Islands Greenland Sea Puerto Rico Japan New Zealand Jamaica Hawaii British Virgin Islands Canada China South Mid-Atlantic Ridge Myanmar Chile Colombia Solomon Islands Kyrgyzstan Texas Utah Wyoming California Percentage 20.9 12.9 6.4 6.4 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 3.2 3.2 3.2 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 100 From Tables 3 & 4, earthquake occurrence on a daily basis can be classified into two types i.e. normal and abnormal. A “normal” day usually records around 100 tremors. For an “abnormal” day, the number of quakes registered are in excess of 200, or twice that of a normal day. 54 The abnormal situation happens when a large quake occurs along with its accompanying aftershocks. Based on this, we see that on a normal day, taking August 7, 2018 as an example, there were 62 quakes in the NEIC data. There were two cluster of events that day, with 21 % located in Alaska and another 13 % were in Indonesia. The rest of the world received between 6.4 to 1.6 % of the shocks. However, on an abnormal day, using August 19, 2018 as a reference, there were three cluster of events, with 59.6 % of the quakes being concentrated in one area i.e. the Fiji Islands. Two other regions – Alaska had 13.5 % while Indonesia received 12.9 %. The rest of the globe got between 3.5 and 0.3 %. What does this show us? This indicates that during a 24 hour-period, when earthquake activity increases or is active in one area, the number of tremors in other parts of the world significantly decreases. On a normal day, or with a normal background seismic level, the rate would be below 10% for most parts of the world. But during abnormal days, the rest of the world receives less than 5 % of the daily tremors. This is a drop of over 50 %! This suggests that continental drift does not play a part in global earthquake distribution. It is the “source” which triggers the quakes in the first place that dictates the criteria regarding the number of tremors and where they occur. The same scenario can be observed with UFO waves. When the main cluster of UFO sightings is registered in region ‘A’, other parts of the world have little or no sightings. However, when the sightings in region ‘A’ decline or subside, isolated sightings of UFOs began to appear in the other regions. These observations indicate that a single triggering source could be responsible for the appearance of UFOs and the occurrence of earthquakes. For earthquakes, in the case of a mega-event since most of the ground plates are in close proximity to each other, whether they were small or large plates, surprisingly there was no reciprocal chain-reaction of events. Although every action normally results in a responsive opposite reaction, with plate tectonics these appear to be random, with the rocks gripping, sliding and breaking only at a single localized point. Most other sections of the tectonic plates remain untouched. In reality it should be the other way around. When a large quake measuring 8.0 or greater occurs, all other active seismic areas around the world should resonate along with the main event. 55 Even though they may share different tectonic plates located far apart, the fact that the Earth is one small sphere with the tectonic plates lying in close proximity. Because the Earth’s mantle is common to all, the effect of one big quake should set up the dynamics for the other plates to slide or collide with their neighbours, but this has never been reported. For example, an earthquake in Japan seems unrelated to earthquakes in Chile. Understanding the patterns exhibited during UFO sightings and those seen during earthquake events, could pave the way to better understand the source or triggering stimulus for both UFOs and earth tremors, if any are present. If they share a common denominator, both UFOs and earthquakes should exhibit similar patterns when they occur. Spatial Distribution When many UFO sightings are reported on any given day, it is possible to plot their geographical distribution. And most of them tend to be aligned along straight lines on the Great Circle. As we have seen, although this straight line pattern was discovered during the 1954 UFO wave, during the 1896/1897 Airship Mystery, the phenomenon showed this straight line distribution as can be seen in California (Figure 12) and in the Midwest of the United States (Figure 13) Figure 12: The Straight Line Corridor of Airship sightings in October – November 1896 in Central California from San Francisco to Bowman. 56 Figure 13: The Straight Line Corridor of Airship sightings in November 1896 from Visalia to near Stockton. This same straight line alignment was also seen during the 1909 wave in Britain (see Figure 14 below). Figure 14: The Straight Line Corridor of Airship sightings in May in Wales in 1909. Earthquakes are more numerous on a daily basis and occasionally show the same straight line distribution basis. 57 However, most of the time earthquake epicenters tend to be aligned along straight lines in a narrow 5-km wide corridor. On any given day, it is possible to see at least three epicenters aligned precisely in a straight line. One example is given below for an event on April 29, 2017 between Cordova, Alaska and the British Virgin Islands. The distance between these two epicenters was 7,750 km. Figure 15: The Precise Straight Line Alignment of Three Earthquake Epicenters on April 27, 2017. Mode of Manifestation UFO sightings in any given area can manifest in three forms, namely, the UFO appears as a single, isolated, random event and is seen at widely separated locations. This is the most common mode of manifestation and it happens on a daily basis around the globe. The next form is when sightings are confined to a small area, usually a town or village. The sighting reports tend to cluster in these small areas for a period of between three to seven days. After that period everything returns to normal, with no more UFO sightings in the area. These minor pockets of UFO activity occur about a dozen times around the world each year. This form of sighting usually attracts the media’s attentions and they report them. The most significant aspect of the UFO phenomenon is when they occur in large numbers known as UFO waves, but these are limited to a specific geographical region. The intensity of the UFO wave varies each year from location to location. The largest UFO waves ever recorded were in 1954 in France and 1973 in the United States. Incidentally, both of these waves peaked in October. The duration of a UFO wave is usually between a week to eight months and long duration waves are not common. 58 Most of them start to drop off after about four weeks. After that the UFOs may move to a new geographical location, sometimes close by, but also further away. There are three notable characteristics observed during UFO waves. One, involves mainly fly-overs, with large number of lighted orbs moving in formation, with the sighting of stationary lights in the sky lasting for several minutes. Most of these sightings are at a high altitude. There are very few reports of low level UFOs, landing reports or encounters with the occupants of the UFOs. In this type of wave, the conditions necessary for any landing appear to be missing. In the second category, while there are many reports of strange lights in the night sky, there are also many reports of UFO landings and encounters with the occupants. In the third category, there is a flurry of sightings in a small area. Its duration is short and only lasts for a few days. These three forms of UFO manifestations should throw some light on the prevailing ideal condition needed to appear close to the ground or make any landing. We summed up the situation in Table 5 below: Table 5: Three Categories of UFO Waves UFO Wave Category Nature of UFO Activity Type 1 High flying, single or in formation. No landings. No encounter report. Low intensity wave. Affect a small area. Type 2 High flying, single or in formation. Many low flying & landings. Reports of close encounter with UFO occupants. Abduction claims. High intensity wave affect a large area. Type 3 Low intensity UFO sightings in a small localized area 59 Possible Cause Natural existing force such as the Earth’s magnetic field not conducive for low approach or landing. Natural conditions became ideal for close approach or landings. Natural conditions ideal for a small scale manifestation As a comparison let us take a look at the three type of seismic events. Table 6: Three Categories of Earthquake Events Earthquake Category Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Nature of Event Possible Cause Single isolated tremor. Low magnitude Large magnitude quake with numerous aftershocks Earthquake swarms Plate collision Subduction- one plate slides into another Seepage or presence of water in underlying rocks Intensity of Events The intensity of a UFO wave is directly proportional to the number of UFO landings seen and humanoid or alien beings encountered in conjunction with the number of UFO reports generated. The intensity of an earthquake on the other hand, depends on the energy being released from the ground and the number of aftershocks associated with the main shock. Even though both events are not identical, their intensity appears to be caused by the same triggering factor, as if both events shared a common extra-solar origin. Periodicity The average cycle of UFO waves is about 10 years (Jamaludin, 1979). This means that any particular region on Earth could possibly experience a UFO wave about once every 10 years. The United States being a larger continent usually experiences two UFO waves, back to back, in successive years. This can be seen in the 1896/1897 wave, the 1965 Midwest UFO wave and the 1966 Northeastern wave and to a lesser extent the 1974/1975 waves. The situation in Europe is however different. Europe normally experiences a wave about once every 10 years and it also got a boost with another succeeding wave in the region between one to three years later. In other words, while other parts of the world needed to wait 10 years for a UFO wave, Europe got the bonus of experiencing another wave a year or two after the first one. This can be seen in the 1909 wave followed by the smaller 1913 wave in Britain. In the modern era, a UFO wave struck England in 1967 followed by the 60 1968 wave in Spain. The same thing happened in 1977 with the UFO wave in Wales followed by the Italian UFO wave in 1978. This cycle repeated again 10 years later with the 1988 Belgium wave followed by the 1989 wave in Ukraine. Why this pattern occurred over Europe will be explained in Chapter 7. In Southeast Asia, the same 10-year trend of UFO waves making a comeback to this region can be seen in 1948, with the wave occurring in Indochina and the Philippines. Eleven years later the wave returned to the region, when it was recorded in Papua New Guinea in 1959. And again 11 years later, the wave occurred again, but this time in Malaysia in 1970. Adhering to the 10-year cycle, the UFO wave returned to the region again, but a year earlier, when a wave was registered in the Philippines in 1979. The fallout from this wave was also seen in Malaysia. The reason why UFO waves fluctuates between 9 to 11 years in Southeast Asia is due to the fact that there was a delay in its occurrence over Europe. Why this situation occurs will be seen in Chapter 7. For large earthquakes this 9-11 years pattern was not observable. But a few studies carried out did show that some areas experienced an earthquake after a 10-year lapse. If some regions on Earth have to wait 10 years for another UFO wave, it appears that other regions have the next significant earthquake much sooner. However, the observed 11-year cycle is also notable in the occurrence of sunspots. Sunspots are dark, cooler areas on the Sun which are active for 11 years then decline for another 11 years before the cycle repeats again. In general, the consensus is that sunspots are a localized internal process within the Sun. But there is a possibility that sunspots are not merely a physical process in the Sun, but are triggered by an external source. See Appendix C for a look into this possibility. Geographical Orientation Over time, all natural events such as floods, tornadoes, hurricanes and earthquakes change their direction and several local dynamics processes control the progress. If UFOs (and UFO waves) are also a natural event, over time they would also alter their manifestation. This becomes more significant if UFO waves are caused by an extraterrestrial source. Table 7 below lists UFO waves and their observed shift, taking into account their geographical coordinates. 61 Table 7: Geographical Migration of Major UFO Waves. Year 1960 1962 1965 1967 1970 1977 1978 1988 Geographical Coordinate #1 New Zealand Argentina Midwest USA England Malaysia Wales Italy Belgium Year Geographical Coordinate #2 Argentina Southwest USA Northeast USA Spain South Africa Italy The Philippines Ukraine 1962 1964 1966 1968 1972 1978 1979 1989 Geographical Shift East to West South to North South to North West to East East to West West to East West to East West to East On a local scale, the geographical migration of UFO manifestations during the wave period were seen to move northwards in South America. Most UFO activities in Latin America start from the southern tip of the region and over time move northwards. In the Continental United States, it is always from the southwest to the northeast. The early 1896 wave started from California before migrating to the northeast. The 1965 UFO wave started in the Midwest before striking the northeastern states in 1966. In Europe, in all instances when a UFO wave occurred in the United Kingdom, the next wave would be to the east of it. We see this happening in 1967 in the United Kingdom followed by a wave in Spain in 1968. The same thing happened in 1977 with the wave in Wales followed the 1978 UFO wave in Italy. In 1987 there was no recorded UFO wave in the United Kingdom, but a wave later struck Belgium in 1988. By 1989 it had moved north and east of Belgium to manifest in the Ukraine. This wave then shifted further eastwards into the western parts of Russia by early 1990. All of these geographical shifts of the UFO waves indicate that they divide the Earth into two distinct portions. One portion is in the Western Hemisphere while the other was in the Eastern Hemisphere. The first slice of the Great Circle route arches from South America into the Continental United States, before crossing over into Europe. After the wave dominated the European theatre, it appeared as if its migration track had sliced the Earth’s magnetic field and it took a route across Asia and 62 progressed southwards over the South Pole. Any region located close to the Eastern Hemisphere’s track would experience a UFO wave as can be seen in the waves of 1948 (Indochina), 1959 (Papua New Guinea), 1970 (Malaysia), 1979 (Philippines) and 1999 (Malaysia) in Southeast Asia. Large earthquakes also showed the same tendency to shift up and down the latitudes with time (see Chapter 10). However, this does not replicate the same geographical shift seen during major UFO waves. All of these geographical migrations of global UFO waves, show us that the 10-year cycle actually moves around the Earth. If we take these localised UFO waves as its ground track, then by projecting it into the sky, it appears to represent the orbit of some unknown source. This source appears to orbit around the Sun over a mean 10-year cycle. We shall refer to this hypothetical source as the mysterious ‘Source X’. *** 63 Chapter 6 Major UFO Wave Cycles and Their Interpretations UFO sightings come in three forms. In category one, the sightings were individual, isolated random manifestation somewhere on Earth. This type of sighting occurs over the globe almost on a daily basis. In the second category there was a day or two of UFO activity confined to a small geographical area which usually involved just a town or village. We see this form of minor cluster of sightings as a spate or flurry of events for a few days. This type of minor cluster happens about a dozen times per year somewhere on Earth. In the third category, UFOs appear in large numbers over a certain period of time and cluster around a bigger area than in category two. The cluster of sightings involve many locations, towns and cities and is called a UFO wave. A major UFO wave occurs about once a year. Most landings and encounters with alien humanoids will usually take place during a UFO wave. A UFO wave comes in varying intensities. The magnitude of a UFO wave can be determined based on its duration, size of area affected, and the number of sightings recorded, primarily with emphasis on the landings and encounters with the UFO occupants. The largest magnitude UFO wave documented so far was the 1954 wave in France, followed with the 1973 wave in the United States and a lesser one in 1947. Another wave that is also intense in nature involved the areas of Ukraine and Russia during the 1989-1990 period. Such an intense wave has never been recorded since. A UFO wave may last just a week or two, while others could last over eight weeks. For long duration waves, the phenomenon spreads over a wide area and will shift its activities geographically. A long duration wave usually had a lull of a few weeks in between. It was observed that in the Western Hemisphere the wave would usually start from the south in South America and in time would gradually move northwards. While in the Eastern Hemisphere, the trend is always to shift southwards. However, in Europe UFO activity usually migrates eastwards and progresses 64 into the Eastern Hemisphere. The overall picture clearly shows that UFO waves move around the Earth in a circle. UFO waves have also occurred in the ancient past. It was only in 1883 that the reality of UFO waves became clearer. By 1896 with the outbreak of the Californian Airship Mystery, the 1897 Midwest wave continued into the modern era with the surge of Flying Saucer reports in the United States in 1947. For the first time in history, we were faced with the possibility of the existence of extraterrestrial beings. This happened at about the same time that mankind began its space-race. Another distinct pattern present in a UFO wave is the fact that a second or third wave-front, usually of a lesser intensity than the primary one, will develop at another location across the continent (refer to Chapter 8). These clusters or pockets of UFO sightings are usually arranged in a X-shaped configuration (see Chapter 8). In reality, the distribution pattern is like a see-saw effect. This will be discussed later as it shows us the nature or behaviour of the hypothetical source which could stimulate or contribute to the occurrence of UFO waves. UFO waves that occurred over the past hundred years, remain unexplained to this day. Sociologists and psychologists have tried to explain away UFO waves as being due to mass hallucinations or hysteria. But a closer look at their distribution pattern suggests otherwise. The question that we should be asking is - why do we have UFO waves in the first place? Why do they appear at different locations each year? And why do they appear in large numbers and then, as suddenly as they appear, abruptly vanish in time? During the 1954 UFO wave in France, the majority of the UFO occupants encountered were of small stature. But during the 1973 United States UFO wave, there were a number of different kinds of beings encountered in the same region. So the next question to ask – why do different types of UFO beings arrive in the same area during a UFO wave? Due to our current lack of knowledge about the makeup of the universe and the evolution of other intelligent life forms in the vastness of space, coupled to our understanding that it is not possible to travel faster than light, UFO waves cannot be explained satisfactorily or scientifically at this point of time. This would however change if we could make a significant discovery - the possible relationship between UFOs and earthquakes. 65 The known documented UFO waves for the period 1896 till 2020 are given in Table 8 below. There are some years with no documented UFO wave being recorded. Several factors could cause this lack of information, such as if the wave had occurred over the ocean, in uninhabited locations, deserts or in countries that do not document or report UFO sightings. For the period 2003 until 2020, there were no reports of any major UFO waves, except for small pockets of low-intensity sightings reported around the globe. This is an interesting turn of events as for the past 100 years, the occurrence of major UFO waves had been consistent at about one wave per year. Table 8: UFO Waves Documented between 1896 to 2020. Year 1896 1897 1909 1913 Country California, USA Midwest States, USA United Kingdom Wales, United Kingdom 1914 South Africa 1915 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 United Kingdom Western Europe Scandinavia Northwestern USA Indochina & Philippines No record Possibly South America Month November April May JanuaryFebruary Aug 9 – Sep. 11 January September June-July June-July August ----- 1951 1952 No Record Central & Eastern USA --July-August 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 No Record France Possibly Europe Possibly Europe Central & Eastern USA Japan Papua New Guinea New Zealand No Record Argentina --Sept.-October ----November --June ----September 1963 No record --66 Note Mystery Airships Mystery Airships Airship Scare Phantom Airships Phantom monoplanes Foo Fighters Ghost Rockets Flying Saucers Sightings in North Africa Spate of sightings around Washington D.C – July 14 to Aug 15. Fallout into Italy South America: May Increase of reports in Brazil 1964 1965 1966 1967 1968 South Western USA Midwest USA Eastern USA England Spain April August March-April October 1969 1970 No Record Malaysia --August 1971 No Record --- 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 South Africa Brazil & SE USA USA USA Northeastern USA July October August October June 1977 Wales, United Kingdom April-May 1978 Italy & South America November 1979 Philippines & Malaysia April-May 1980 South America June 1981 No Record --- 1982 1983 Brazil/Argentina No record 1984 No Record 1985 No Record 1986 No Record 1987 No Record 1988 Belgium South America: June Second Front in Argentina Western Europe: August Western Europe: October Significant events in France, Spain & England Significant events in Brazil in Oct-Nov Pocket of UFO events in Australasia in DecemberJanuary 1979 Significant events in Brazil Spate of UFO sightings in China in November UFO flap in Turkey, Dec 15 till Jan. 9, 1982 Significant events in Spain (Feb. & Oct) and Argentina in Nov.-Dec) Spate of sightings in Hudson Valley, NY, USA Spate of sightings in Hudson Valley, NY, USA December 67 Significant events in Italy in June Spate of sightings in the United Kingdom Significant events in 1989 Russia &Ukraine October 1990 1991 Russia& Ukraine No Record August 1992 1993 No Record No Record 1994 No Record 1995 South Africa 1996 No Record 1997 No Record 1998 1999 No Record Malaysia 2000 Chile& Argentina 2001 Brazil & Chile Late March – Mid April USA in June-August Surge of sightings in Canada Spate of sightings in Mexico. Significant events in Puerto Rico in MayAugust Significant events in Israel in March & May and Italy in June-July. Significant increase of reports in Canada in October Spate of sightings in Michigan, Italy, Mexico (July & Sept.)&Puerto Rico (August) Significant events in Puerto Rico (MarchDecember) Spain: Nov 28 – Jan 1969 Significant events in Brazil & Mexico Significant events in Brazil (April-May)& Italy in May, July & Sep. Significant increase of CE3 cases in Brazil (Feb-July & Nov-December). China: Nov 14- Dec 11, spate of sightings between Shanghai & Beijing 35 CE3 cases in Chile& 16 in Argentina Increase of CE3 cases in Brazil (28)& Chile (28). Surge of CE3 cases in India (15) 68 2002 Argentina 2003 2004 No record No record 2005 No record 2006 2007 No record No record 2008 No record 2009 No record 2010 No record 2011 2012 No record No record Spike in cases in Canada in August Surge of CE3 cases in Argentina. Sri Lanka: Spate of sightings around Polonnaruwa in 1st week of June Surge in CE3 cases in Mexico in January & Chile in July Spate of UFOs in Iran in April Spate of CE3 cases in Argentina in March. Spate of UFOs in Norway in August West Midland, UK: April Spate of sightings in United Kingdom & Europe August: Spate of UK sightings in Dereham, Downham Market, Holkham, Caister and Norwich. May-Sep: Sightings from Brandesburton in East Yorkshire to Scarborough, North Yorkshire. June-July: Spate of sightings in Hunan, Shandong and Jiangsu, Xinjiang provinces in China August: In Colchester, Essex, England September-October: Spate of sightings in the Ladakh area on the India-China border December: Spate of 69 2013 2014 No record No record 2015 No record 2016 No record 2017 No record 2018 2019 No record No record 2020 No record sightings in Sri Lanka Surge in reports in July in USA September – Surge of winged beings sighted in Malaysia & Singapore Decline in UFO reports in the US from 2016 – 2018 (NUFORC & MUFON) June-July: Portugal November: Midwest & Eastern USA. End November: Russia (Urals, Volga, Samara, Perm, Omsk & Kazakhstan) USA- Surge in reports in April Brazil -Flap started on May 15 in the Rio de Janeiro area Figure 16: Global Major UFO Wave Cycle 1945 –1954. 70 Based on the observations from the tables above, it is possible to plot the distribution pattern of major UFO waves around the globe for the period 194445 until 1988. Figures 16-19 plot the routes taken by major UFO waves around the Earth for that period. It clearly shows that UFO waves occur in cycles of about 9-14 years. The period 1944-45 saw the appearance of anomalous flying objects known as Foo Fighters over Europe. After that period a UFO wave occurred further north at a higher latitude over the Scandinavian countries in 1946. At that time the sightings were attributed to ‘Ghost Rockets’. Due to the wave track making an imaginary loop at above 60 degrees North Latitude, the 1947 Flying Saucer wave occurred in the Northwestern parts of the United States and not the European zone. However, by 1948, it had swung back into the Eastern Hemisphere with a UFO wave being reported in Indochina and the Philippines. There was no documented UFO wave in 1949 as the chart above shows that it was over the South Pole. After a lapse of a year, in 1950 another UFO wave occurred in South America. After the Latin American wave, the UFO wave route moved northwesterly over the Pacific Ocean in 1951, then turned northeasterly to the northeastern part in the United States in 1952. This was when the term ‘UFO wave’ first appeared. Figure 17: Global Major UFO Wave Cycle 1954 – 1967 71 In 1953 the UFO wave appeared over the Atlantic Ocean before arriving over France in September 1954. One of the most intense UFO waves in the history of ufology occurred in France with its peak during the month of October of that year (see figure 17). We can see during the period 1944-45 to 1954 that the route, or UFO wave track, moved in a clockwise manner around the world. It started in Europe and returned to Europe in 1954, ten years later. This is one complete cycle of global major UFO waves for that period. The second cycle of major UFO wave which covered the period 1954 to 1967, saw the same geographical progression of events. Taking France as the starting point, it goes as usual into an imaginary loop over Europe. The period 1955 to 1956 did not record any major UFO waves, but there was a significant increase of UFO sightings in the region. Probably due to the wave track swing at the high latitude, which was similar to the one seen in the earlier cycle, a UFO wave occurred in the northeastern part of the United States proceeding into Canada in 1957. By 1958, again applying the same principle, the wave track swung back to the Eastern Hemisphere with a UFO wave being registered in Japan. As usual in the Eastern Hemisphere, the route taken is always in a southerly direction with a UFO wave being recorded in Papua New Guinea in 1959. By 1960 it had reached New Zealand. In 1962, when the track emerged from the south polar region into the Western Hemisphere, a UFO wave occurred in Argentina and Brazil. Once in the Western Hemisphere, the wave track moved northwards. In 1963 there were no UFO waves being recorded, but in 1964 a UFO wave had occurred in the southwestern part of the United States. By 1965 it had moved into the Midwest and proceeded northeasterly to cross the Atlantic in 1966 (with a high number of UFO sightings being registered in Northeast USA). In 1967 the UFO wave route had reached the United Kingdom and a major UFO wave was recorded there. As usual after crossing the English zone, the next UFO target was western Europe and in 1968 a UFO wave struck Spain. As seen in the earlier cycle, major UFO waves occurred in Europe after taking a round trip around the Earth. If we take 1954 as the starting point and it returned to the same region in Spain in 1968, the round trip took 14 years to complete 72 one cycle. The next cycle of major UFO waves begins with the 1967 English UFO wave as its starting point. Figure 18: Global Major UFO Wave Cycle 1967 – 1977. As noted above, a major UFO wave occurred in the United Kingdom in 1967. Again it followed the same trend of executing an imaginary loop to connect smoothly with the 1968 Spanish UFO wave. Since it was a short loop, the wave route quickly swung into the Eastern Hemisphere, crossing into China in 1969 and moving southwards to reappear in Malaysia in August 1970. In 1971 no major UFO wave was reported as the chart shows that it occurred over the Indian Ocean. But in 1972 it had reached South Africa and a major UFO wave was recorded there. In 1973 it crossed into the Western Hemisphere, not via the South Pole, but close to the southern tip of the South African continent. In 1973 it was over Latin America with many sightings being reported, but it also struck the southeastern parts of the United States as well. Historically, the 1973 UFO wave in the United States was the second most intense UFO wave ever recorded. Just like the 1954 French UFO wave, it too had its peak in the month of October. As can be seen, in 1973 its actual position was over Brazil, but it was in a favourable position to strike the southeastern parts of the United States. This is probably due to the fact that the contributing source (at perigee) was at its 73 closest approach to Earth. Usually it passes over the South Pole. But for 1973, after grazing South Africa in 1972, it was much nearer and within striking distance of the south-eastern parts of the United States. By 1974-1975 it had crossed over into the Continental United States. As usual the geographical migration pattern seen in UFO waves took it over the Atlantic Ocean in 1976. By 1977 a big UFO wave had occurred, with its epicentre in Wales. The tight turn taken from the Eastern Hemisphere into the Western Hemisphere seen in the UFO wave track during 1970 to 1973 had shortened the wave cycle from the previous 14 years back to 10. The wave started in 1967 in England and returned to the same region in 1977 in Wales. Let us take a look at the next cycle lasting from 1977 to 1988 below. Figure 19: Global Major UFO Wave Cycle 1977 – 1988. The forth cycle shown here covered the period 1977 to 1988. After the 1977 UFO wave in the United Kingdom, the route shifted eastwards before going into a short imaginary loop to make a smooth track connection with the next wave. And this UFO wave struck Italy at the end of 1978. By 1979 the track had shifted eastwards striking the Philippines and Malaysia. There were no recorded UFO wave in 1980, as it can be seen from the 74 above chart that its location (the source) was over the Southern Indian Ocean. By 1982 a major UFO wave was recorded in Latin American countries. As the UFO wave tracks moved northwards, it crossed the Continental United States in 1984 and 1985. By 1986 it is over the Atlantic and in 1987 possibly somewhere close to the United Kingdom and by 1988 we see that a major UFO wave occurred over Belgium. This cycle only took 11 years, with its starting point in Wales in 1977 and ending in Belgium in 1988. After 1988, with the usual imaginary loop seen over the European zone, another big wave struck Russia and Ukraine in 1989. As it shifted eastwards, the western parts of Russia and Ukraine continued to be affected in 1990. There were no less than 163 humanoid encounter cases recorded in Russia and 55 incidents in Ukraine in 1990. If both years 1989-1990 were taken together, the Russian-Ukrainian UFO waves marked the largest UFO and humanoid encounters in history with well over 375 landings and humanoid encounter cases surpassing the 1954 French wave in 1954. Just like the 1954 UFO wave, the Russian wave too peaked in October. Evolution of Major UFO Waves After the period of 1990 until 2020, it is not possible to trace the geographical migration tracks of major UFO waves around the world, as records had dwindled after that period. There were only five notable UFO waves or concentrations of UFOs or humanoid reports during this period i.e 1995 in South Africa, 1999 in Malaysia, 2000 in Chile, 2001 in Chile and Brazil and 2002 in Argentina. For a 17 year period between 2003 until 2020, no more major UFO waves were recorded. Whatever caused the major UFO waves, must have gone into a quiescent period of activity. However, the events indicated that UFO waves appear to have undergone some significant changes in form and intensity. It appears that major waves have altered into several minor pockets of activity at several locations around the globe. In this configuration, more UFOs appeared at various geographical regions. Interpretation The interesting observation about major UFO waves, as can be seen in the figures presented above, is the fact that they move around the globe in a 75 cycle with an average period of about 10 years. The actual wave cycle over time, actually fluctuates between 9-14 years. This means that every region where the wave track crossed, experienced a UFO wave about once in every 10 years. However, sometimes, as can be seen the wave returned to the region either a year earlier or later. Something is causing it to reduce or speed up its cycle by about a year or two. The situation over Europe, on the other hand, is different. This will be discussed in the next chapter. UFO waves as can be seen, always move northwards in the Western Hemisphere, but in the Eastern Hemisphere it is in the opposite direction i.e. southwards. This gives the impression that the wave, or the source which caused the wave, moves around the Earth in a circle. The UFO wave charts for the period 1945 to 1988 shown above confirm this. This specific geographical region where the UFO tracks occur, will experience a UFO wave about once every ten years. Take for example the Southeast Asian zone. A UFO wave occurred in Indochina and the Philippines in 1948, then, about 11 years later, in Papua New Guinea in 1959, then again 11 years later a wave struck Malaysia in 1970. But nine years later, arriving earlier than usual, the 1979 UFO wave occurred in the Philippines and Malaysia again. There was no expected 10-year cycle of the UFO wave between 1989-90 in Southeast Asia (during this period, the wave was still over Europe). The wave only arrived in Malaysia nine years later in 1999 as part of another cycle. The time lag was due to the fact that the migration of UFO waves around the globe does not occur in a neat circle. UFO waves tend to repeat over Europe in a time frame of between one to three years. There appears to be a break in the continuity of the wave cycle when it crosses over 50 degrees north latitude. The continuity in the cycle can only be completed if we draw an imaginary loop over Europe. This is significant in how we interpret the source of the wave track and also its possible nature (refer to the next chapter). However, as mentioned earlier, after 1990, records of major UFO waves appear to either decline in number or cease altogether. Between 2003 until 2020, there was no specific concentration of major UFO waves recorded anywhere on the globe. On the other hand, there were several smaller pockets of UFO sightings taking place over several widely separated locations around the world. 76 In this form more UFOs appear over various areas in a year. This is a very interesting development, as it might indicate that the source responsible for UFO waves might be experiencing some cosmological-physical changes. The presence of these waves in observable patterns could eliminate the possibility that UFOs are just earthquake lights or psychological in nature. The appearance of UFO waves cannot be attributed to social unrest, or any form of psychological anomaly attributable to fear or traumas caused by political upheaval. This type of social disorder, or any form of psychosis or hallucinations, do not manifest in a circular geographical manner around the Earth. UFO waves are the best indicator that we have to suggest that UFOs are physically real. In other words UFOs are extraterrestrial in nature. In the early days there were attempts to correlate UFO waves with the close approach of Mars. This however was not fruitful. Now that we have concrete evidence that Mars is a barren land, with no form of intelligent life whatsoever, we can forget about the Martians. The fact that UFOs appear on Earth almost on a daily basis, suggests that there are locations in space that are somehow curved, making long distance interstellar flights short and practical. This also suggests that there are actually celestial short cuts in space. This anomaly in the fabric of space-time could either be in the form of an astrophysical hole in space, or a special ‘corridor’. In layman’s language there is a door in the sky. The observed cycle of major UFO waves around the Earth is a clear indication that we are dealing with a physical source located outside the Earth and this is responsible in generating UFO waves. This source is behaving like a door in the sky. And this unidentified source moves or orbits outside the Earth (and the Sun) with a fluctuating or eccentric orbital period of between 9 to 14 years. If such a source exist in reality, we should see the distribution pattern in UFO waves in the following manner: 1. UFO waves occur when the source is in perfect conjunction with the wave area. 2. All types of UFOs and UFO beings of different types will be found in the same wave location. 77 3. UFO activities or location will shift or move geographically with time to maintain their alignment with the source, which is moving in space i.e. its orbital rotation around the Sun. 4. A UFO wave will cease when the alignment between the source and wave area is no longer aligned. In other words the window closes and UFO wave ends. Since major UFO wave cycles cover a period of between 9-14 years, if projected into the sky, this would represent the orbital period of an unknown Source X around the Sun. This source, which contributes to the UFO waves on Earth, is therefore situated relatively close-by. In other words, it is situated in our Solar System. What’s more interesting is that this mean 10 year cycle, or its orbital period around the Sun, would place it somewhere between the planet Mars and Jupiter! However there is no planet or any known astrophysical object in existence at that position. The daily UFO appearances and UFO waves are seen to be strictly tied in time and space. If the phenomenon is governed by a formulae – UFO equals space plus time, there is one important element that is missing in the equation. This missing factor is Source X – the point of origin of UFOs into our reality. The presence of UFO wave tracks, as shown in Figures 16-19, when projected into the sky, therefore represent the orbital rotational period of this Source X around the Sun. While all the planets in the Solar System had fixed periodic rotational periods around the Sun, Source X however fluctuates between 9 and 14 years. Its eccentric and elliptical orbit shows that it is not a planet, but most probably a natural body of some kind. *** 78 Chapter 7 UFO Waves and the Imaginary Loop Effect Over Europe Most of the natural events on Earth such as tornadoes, hurricanes, floods and meteor showers etc, seem to be seasonal in nature. The occurrence of UFOs and earthquakes on the other hand, do not belong in this category and seem to adhere to a different set of rules. If we take a look at the UFO waves occurring during the period 1945 to 2002, they appear to move or shift their location each year around the globe (see previous chapter). This geographical shift suggests that the cause of UFO waves is external to the Earth. As an example let us see how the wave migrated, starting from 1962 in Argentina as it moved northwards in time. Extending from Argentina in 1962, the UFO wave shifted its location northwesterly into the Pacific Ocean in 1963, then turned northeast to reappear in the United States with a wave in 1964 in the western section, it then travelled further northeast to hit the Midwest in 1965, then it moved further northeast to the eastern seaboard of the USA with the 1966 UFO wave. The track then crossed the northern Atlantic Ocean and appeared in the United Kingdom in 1967. By 1968 it was over Spain with numerous UFO sightings being made. By 1969, it must have shifted into the Eastern Hemisphere, because by 1970 it had reached Southeast Asia, when a wave of tiny humanoid encounters were recorded in Malaysia. In 1971 there were no documented UFO waves, because its migration track was presumably somewhere over the Indian Ocean. By 1972 it had reached South Africa. In 1973, a major wave occurred in the southeastern section of the United States. From these events we can clearly see that UFO waves move around the Earth, starting in South America, then on to the United States then crossing over to Europe before shifting into Asia. From Asia it will move downwards over Antarctica to re-emerge over South America. So we see that in this example, that one cycle (or circuit) was completed around the globe. The process usually takes between 9 and 14 years. Then the cycle starts all over again, but with some changes to the orientation of 79 the migration tracks. This means that the next cycle will not cross over the same wave epicentre as the previous one. For general reference, the waves always move northwards in the Western Hemisphere and track south to the Eastern Hemisphere. In Europe, the waves commence in the west before moving eastwards. This gave us a global perspective showing that the waves move clockwise in a circle around the Earth. If the wave migration is in a perfect circle around the globe as shown in Figure 20 below, the waves which started in the south at point x1, would complete one cycle by going around the Earth in a complete circle to rejoin at point x1. We can expect several UFO waves to occur somewhere along the Great Circle line, say for example at points x1, x2, x3 and so on. Figure 20: Model of a round cycle around the Earth X4 X3 x5 X2 x6 X1 x7 But in reality, the circle is interrupted over the European zone. Here we see that there are usually two UFO waves taking place in Europe, usually back-to-back within a period of between 1-3 years, whereby, say if a wave struck the United Kingdom in 1967, the next wave will occur slightly to the east and in this case it happened just a year later in Spain in 1968. The same trend repeated itself ten years later when another wave occurred in the United Kingdom in 1977. The eastward shift later resulted in the 1978 Italian UFO wave. In these two examples the time separation was only a year. To complete the cycle in these UFO waves, the lines joining them have to be executed as an imaginary loop as shown in Figures 21-24 below. However, in 1909 after the UFO wave struck the United Kingdom, it returned to the same region in early 1913. 80 Unlike the 1967-1968 and 1977-1978 periods, which took only a year, the preceding wave came about three and a half years later. The imaginary loop took much longer then. Figure 21: The imaginary Loop for UFO Waves over Europe for the period 1944-45 to 1947. The first imaginary loop in the modern UFO era was noticeable in the 1944-45 period. To make a smooth connection between the 1944-45 UFO wave in Germany with the 1946 Scandinavian UFO wave and later extend this to the western parts of the United States, there we have to draw an imaginary loop over Europe. Since the loop occurs in the northern latitudes, its far-out swing caused a UFO wave in the northwestern parts of the United States in 1947. There is a reason why this happened. 81 Figure 22: The Imaginary Loop over Europe for the 1967 - 1978 UFO Waves During the 1967-1968 period, to connect the 1967 British UFO wave with the 1968 Spanish wave without breaking its continuity, the same imaginary loop must be drawn. Here we see that the wave cycle was not broken as it joins the 1967 wave smoothly to the 1968 wave and later shifts towards the 1969 (unrecorded) wave which most probably took place in China. The assumed wave location in China is valid, as the next UFO wave in the cycle occurred in Malaysia in 1970. Figure 23: The Imaginary Loop over Europe for the 1977 - 1978 UFO Waves 82 The same imaginary loop is observable during the 1977 - 1978 period. The 1977 UFO wave in Wales connects smoothly with the 1978 Italian UFO wave, before shifting its location towards Southeast Asia in 1979, when a UFO wave occurred in the Philippines and Malaysia. Figure 24: The Imaginary Loop over Europe for the 1988 - 1990 UFO Waves The 1988 to 1990 period again requires that an imaginary loop is drawn over Europe. It is noticeable that the 1988 Belgian UFO wave progressed eastwards to connect with the 1989 UFO wave in Ukraine. As the 1989 wave shifted into western Russia, the imaginary loop demonstrates the short distance and time frame between the Ukrainian wave area and the Russian region in 1990. Why does it have to be like this? If we assume that UFO waves moves around the Earth in cycles (or circles), one tends to note that in the northern hemisphere, especially at a latitude above 50 degrees north, in order to complete the cycle, we have to draw the imaginary loop to join all the wave locations in one complete circle around the globe. These cycles would look like a figure 8. 83 Without this imaginary loop, all the UFO wave locations around the world cannot be placed in a neat, continuous cycle as it would be broken over Europe. This imaginary loop effect is an important indicator that the source of the UFO waves had its origin high over the North Pole. In other words, there is an extrasolar stimulus in the sky. If that is the case, then the imaginary loop seen represents the position of the source as it moves further away from the Sun or at its aphelion, which is the point at which the mysterious source is furthest from the sun. This becomes much clearer when we project the UFO wave track into the sky to represent the orbit of the hypothetical source in an elliptical manner as it recedes away from the Sun. By overlying the figure 8 or loop into the orbit, we see now why Europe had UFO waves more often than the other regions. At its point of apogee, Europe was still within its scope of influence allowing it to create UFO waves (refer to Figure 25 below). Figure 25: Interpretation of the Imaginary Loop Over Europe 84 Looking back at the historical records in the United Kingdom, we can see the same imaginary loop effect was present even back then. It is depicted in Figure 26 below. Figure 26: The Imaginary Loop Effect in Europe for the 1909 to 1913 Period. During the 1909 Airship Scare in the United Kingdom, the next wave returned to the area in early 1913, with reports of the so-called Phantom Airships. The imaginary loop took about three years in this case. After the 1913 wave subsided, with the usual eastwards shift, we should expect to see flurries of sightings either in western Europe in the 1914-15 time frame due to the long 3year loop. The wave could have moved directly downwards towards the African Continent (without shifting to the Eastern Hemisphere). There were flurries of reports of phantom monoplanes sighted in South Africa during August to September 1914. The UFO wave tracks observed for the period 1944-45 to 1990 show that the tracks or routes travelled around the Earth, passing over or near the South and North Poles. It is likely that many locations on this route were exposed to the possibility that a UFO wave would occur in the area. Since UFO waves occur in pulses of about once a year, only areas lying in the correct position and time for the major pulse will experience the wave. 85 The route taken by the primary source or stimulus for the UFO wave actually crossed over the American continent into Canada before crossing over the North Poles (refer to Figure 27 below). But why do UFO waves strike the European region instead and not the North Pole? Herein lies the biggest and most significant clue to the nature of the source which causes UFO waves. By right, all the waves should be distributed along the Great Circle from South America to Canada and over the North Pole before crossing over into the Eastern Hemisphere. But as the source orbits around the Sun, depicted by the UFO tracks, it crosses into the Continental United States instead. The waves tracks were seen to deflect away from the magnetic north pole. The actual deflected migration track of UFO waves take a path that cuts across the Continental USA and heads towards Europe. The wave track takes the form of a figure 8 as a result of the magnetic deflection during aphelion (the source of the waves) or its point furthest away from the Sun. Figure 27: Deflection of UFO Route Away From Magnetic North Pole. 86 After crossing over Europe within a period of one to three years, the UFO wave track will shift into Asia and back onto the Great Circle line. The observed deflection effect would have something to do with the Earth’s magnetic field. Remember that when two magnetic bars are held close together, the positives repel each other while negative and positive attract. The same situation seem to be in play over the Magnetic North Pole and we see the repelling effect. Major UFO waves which should have occurred over the North Pole were being deflected into Europe instead. During apogee, the position of Source X, being furthest away from the Earth and the Sun, the directional energy beam that it emits will be focused or directed towards Europe during this period. So we see that Europe does not experience a UFO wave once every 10 years, but twice within a year or two. As Source X recedes from apogee and gets nearer to the Sun, the beam strikes Asia as it is less affected by the magnetism of the North Magnetic Pole and hence the beam returns to the track of the earlier UFO waves. This deflection effect is not present or observed when Source X is near or over the South Pole. Interpretation. The geographical migration or movement of major UFO waves around the world, which appears to travel in a clockwise direction and affects both halves of the Western and Eastern Hemispheres in a mean 10 year cycle, is a clear indication that we are dealing with an extraterrestrial cause for the phenomenon. Sociological or psychological factors cannot cause this to occur, as the dynamics behind this are governed by local circumstances rather than geography. The large volume of UFO sighting reports made across the globe cannot be due to the misinterpretation of normal mundane objects, as the waves show that they are governed by distinct geographical trends. The need to draw an imaginary line over Europe to complete the continuity cycle of major UFO waves around the globe, further strengthens the fact that the source of UFOs appearances is coming from a celestial body that orbits around the Sun like any other planet in this Solar System, except that its orbit is eccentric and inclined to the ecliptic. The presence of the imaginary loop can only be interpreted as the point of apogee, whereby the orbit of the source is furthest away from the Earth and the Sun. 87 While all of the planets in the Solar System revolve in the ecliptic plane, Source X, is inclined to the ecliptic and its orbit actually passes over the North and South Poles. The Earth’s axis is tilted at 23.5 degrees to its orbital plane, which is in line with the orbital inclination of Source X. This raises the possibility that the inclination of the Earth’s axis at 23.5 degrees is the result of the magnetic influence of Source X early in the history of the Solar System! The observed wandering of the Earth’s North Magnetic Pole is another indication of the possible presence of Source X. The shift in the magnetic poles appears to be associated with the local weakening of the Earth’s magnetic field. It has have been observed that for the North Magnetic Pole, the movement is up to 40 kilometers per year. Over the last 180 years, the North Magnetic Pole has been migrating northwestward, from Cape Adelaide to 600 kilometres from Resolute Bay in Canada. The Earth's magnetic field had been observed to fluctuate from time to time. At present, the overall geomagnetic field is progressively becoming weaker. It has gone up and down in the past for reasons that are still unknown. The Earth's Magnetic North Pole has drifted from northern Canada towards Siberia at a rate of 10 kilometres per year at the beginning of the 20th century. By 2003 it had increased to 40 kilometres per year. This trend since then has accelerated and the existence of Source X, being a magnetized body, could explain why this is happening. For the past 150 years, the Earth's magnetic field strength had shown a relative decay of about 10%. The inclination of the Earth's field is 90 degrees downwards at the North Magnetic Pole and minus 90 degrees upwards at the South Magnetic Pole. The two poles seem to wander independently of each other. They are not dipole which mean that they are not directly opposite one another on the globe. The Earth's magnetic field reverses the North and South Magnetic Poles respectively, abruptly switching places at irregular intervals of several hundred thousand years. The Earth’s magnetic field is actually not in a stable position over geological time. For reasons that are not completely understood, the magnetic field decays periodically and then becomes re-established again. When that happens the Earth’s magnetic field may be oriented the way it was before the decay, or it may be oriented with the polarity reversed. 88 While this is attributed to internal geomagnetic processes, there is a possibility that the actual cause could be coming from outside the Earth. As no known celestial body of a magnetic nature is known to exist in this Solar System, the presence of Source X could change our perspective altogether. Between South America and southern Africa, there is an enigmatic magnetic region called the ‘South Atlantic Anomaly’, where the field is much weaker than expected. As noted in the cycles of major UFO waves, the regions of South America, especially its southern tip and further south of South Africa over the Artic, is the turning point of the UFO wave cycle from the Eastern Hemisphere into the Western Hemisphere. Source X having a magnetic nature, would exert pressure to the South Magnetic Pole over the years. For this reason we can see the presence of the weak magnetic spot known as the South Atlantic Anomaly. Therefore it seems that a slow process of demagnetization has occurred over the years. Another interesting point to note is the so-called geomagnetic jerk or secular geomagnetic variation impulse. It is a relatively sudden change in the second derivative of the Earth's magnetic field with respect to time. Scientists believe that the events originated in the interior of the Earth, rather than some external phenomenon such as the solar wind etc. However, the precise cause is still unknown, but the existence of Source X, being of highly magnetic nature, could explain these observations. The ‘jerks’ seem to occur at irregular intervals, on an average of about once every 10 years (it actually fluctuates between 8-13 years). Remember that the mean UFO wave cycle is also about 10 years (it fluctuates between 9 and14 years). If Source X is responsible for the UFO waves, then it is logical and scientifically possible that it could also stimulate other geophysical events as well. Sunspots have an 11-year cycle (it also fluctuates between 9 and14 years) which can be considered close to it and most likely related. Each jerk is a relatively sudden change and spread over a period of between a few months and several years. It has been observed that the strength of each jerk varies from location to location. Overall, the global jerks seem to occur at slightly different times in different regions. It was seen to, often occur earlier in the Northern Hemisphere than in the Southern Hemisphere. The interesting observation in plotting the tracks of the UFO waves geographical migration is the fact that the track joins the Eastern and Western 89 Hemispheres in a neat cycle over Antarctica. However, this does not happen over the North Pole. The reason is that when over the Arctic region, the orbit of Source X is actually at apogee, or the point in its orbit which is furthest from the Earth and Sun. And hence we see the deflection of the UFO waves into Europe. As the orbit of Source X passes over the North Pole, its energy beam is being deflected by the magnetic field of the North Pole. This results in the waves striking Europe rather than the North Pole itself. This situation gave rise to the need to draw the imaginary loop over Europe. As Source X orbits the Sun at apogee, its orientation, or striking position, is still over the Northern Hemisphere. For this reason, depending on the length of time taken to reach apogee, UFO waves will continue to strike the European region until the orbit of Source X has shifted to face the Eastern Hemisphere. These observations indicate that Source X is responsible for causing UFO waves (and earthquakes too), and is of a powerfully magnetic nature. The energy released, possibly in the form of a small, directional, compact beam rather like a laser pointer, is being deflected by the magnetic North Pole. On the other hand, the South Pole does not show this effect. The presence of UFO waves and how they occur over Europe, provide us with ample evidence that we are dealing with an as yet unknown astrophysical source in our Solar System. *** 90 Chapter 8 The See-saw Effect in the Clustering of UFO Sightings and Earthquake Epicentres As shown in the previous chapter, UFO waves move geographically over a period of time. This shift gives the impression that the waves migrate around the globe in a mean 10 year cycle. The area or region where the migration track passes will receive a wave about once every decade. However, for the European theater, the wave crosses the region twice during a period of two to three years. These observations indicate that the cause of the UFO phenomenon is extraterrestrial in nature i.e the migration track arches out and is drawn back by an external source. Another interesting observation seen in the manifestation of UFOs is its tendency to cluster at several locations either across the globe or regionally. The distribution pattern of these UFO clusters, or as newspaper reports usually like to call them; waves, flaps, spates or flurries, are seen to occur in see-saw-like configurations. For example, if the main cluster was say at, region A, a second cluster will form at region B later on. When the sighting cluster at B subsides, a third cluster will form either east or west from location B (refer to Figure 28 below). The change in the orientation of Line A-B, results in a reciprocal change to form Line C-D. Figure 28: Four Points Geographical Cluster of UFO Reports 91 When the sightings at region C subside or decrease in intensity, a fourth cluster, usually weaker, will pop up at region D. Region D is the tail-end of the UFO wave for that year. These four point clusters of UFO reports behave like a seesaw, with line A-B shifting over time to form a reciprocal line C-D. Provided the first two locations are known, this see-saw effect can help us to identify the other possible locations of UFO clusters. The third and fourth cluster will developed when the second point shifts either to the left or right (or east or west). A clear example of this can be seen during the 1909 Airship Scare. In May of 1909, the main cluster of reports was concentrated around England and Wales. By July, a second cluster built up in New Zealand. After the airship sightings subsided in New Zealand, a third cluster developed in August, which affected the eastern section of Australia. This see-saw style of location changing should give rise to a fourth cluster somewhere in the northwestern part of Russia in September (see Figure 29 below). However, in September 1909 there was insufficient data to confirm the UFO appearances in that region. Figure 29: The Seesaw Effect of UFO Clusters in four regions We can also see a similar trend during the 1896 Airship Mystery which occurred in central California in November. As the number of sightings died down, a second, smaller cluster of sightings developed to the northwest affecting Washington State and Vancouver, Canada in December. 92 This California-Vancouver line should give rise to a second reciprocal line either to the east or west of it. This second line, however, developed four months later when the third cluster formed around Michigan with the outbreak of the 1897 airship wave. The eastward shift of the California-Vancouver line followed the 1897 Midwest airship wave. As the result of which, we see that Michigan, being the third point in the see-saw effect, the expected fourth point for a UFO cluster would be over the Pacific Ocean, hence we did not notice the fourth cluster, which is usually weaker or has fewer reports (see Figure 30 below). Figure 30: The Seesaw Effect of UFO Clusters in 1896-1897 Let’s check and see if the see-saw effect occurs in the modern era. At the end of 1978 there was a major UFO event in Italy. A month earlier, in October 1978, marked by the case of an Australian pilot, Fred Valentich, who went missing after an encounter with a UFO over Bass Straits, Tasmania, there was a series of UFO events in southeastern Australia. And by November a UFO wave had occurred over Italy. When the number of UFO sightings began to decline in Italy, another pocket of UFO events occurred over New Zealand, this was highlighted by the filming of the Kaikoura lights in December 1978. 93 Figure 31: The See-saw Effect of UFO clusters in 1978 The 1978 distribution of UFO clusters was opposite to the 1909 event. In 1909 it started in the Northern Hemisphere before changing to the Southern Hemisphere. However, in 1978, it started in the south before shifting to the north. The locations also reverse. In 1909 it was a geographical shift from New Zealand to eastern Australia, but in 1978 it was the other way round. The 1978, UFO clusters indicate that the see-saw effect was again occurring. When the Italy-Australia line changes its orientation, a new line emerges marked by the New Zealand-Portugal orientation line. However, there were no pockets of UFO events reported in Portugal. So it likely that the fourth point must have occurred further out over the Atlantic Ocean (refer to Figure 31 above). This type of see-saw effect is also evident in the distribution pattern of earthquakes on a daily or monthly basis. One example can be seen on April 29, 2017 (see Figure 32 below). 94 On April 29, 2017 there were four clusters of seismic activity which appear to be related to each other. The Talkeetna Region in Alaska was one cluster with its opposing cluster situated in the British Virgin Islands. Its reciprocal clusters can be found in the Cordova region of Alaska, with its pair in the North MidAtlantic Ridge. The next example can be seen on August 19, 2018 (see Figure 33 below). The four cluster points for earthquake epicentres were located in Alaska, the Fiji Islands region, Indonesia and Japan. Figure 33: Four Point Orientation Clusters of Earthquakes on August 19, 2018 If UFOs and earthquakes are related, then we can use the see-saw effect as a general guideline to predict earthquakes (see Appendix D). To sum up, during any major UFO wave, we can expect to see four fronts or clusters of UFO sightings. The fourth cluster is occasionally not present due the fact that the wave has either died down or it occurred over the ocean. During the 1909 UFO wave, for example, the fourth front was expected to be in northwestern Russia, but several sightings were documented in Western Europe. The observation that UFO wave sightings or earthquakes cluster at four points across continents would give us a figure ‘X-shaped’ pattern of distribution. In fact, as we can see it actually behaves like a see-saw, when the orientation of one line changes, it affects the next line which changes in conjunction with it. 95 The see-saw effect seen in the distribution of earthquake epicenters and UFO clusters is a good indication that earthquakes and UFO sightings are caused by a common source. And this source cannot have originated on the ground to give the observed see-saw effect. Other evidence shared by both earthquakes and UFOs, suggests that they are not solely an internal geological process (plate tectonics or earthquake lights) but one that is generated from an extra-solar coordinate. The observed see-saw or Xshaped distribution of earthquakes epicenters and reports of UFO clusters, is a further indication of the nature of the source responsible in generating the two events. If the source is extraterrestrial in nature, then the see-saw effect reflects the unstable nature of the source. This means that the angle of the energy beam from the source changes from time to time to give rise to the first line followed by the next line, which is orientated at a different angle. Since they are reciprocal to one another, it points to its common stimuli. As stated in the previous chapter, UFOs and earthquakes are distributed along the straight lines seen on both a local scale or across continents. This straight line distribution of UFO sightings, or earthquake epicentres, changes every minute. So in any given 24-hour period, we can expect to see several of these lines develop and become orientated along various magnetic bearings. The interesting outcome from these observations is that when one line changes slightly to the left or right by just a few degrees, then a second line will take shape as depicted below. For both UFO and seismic events, it will manifest close to the first line. Figure 34: Orientation of UFO sightings or Earthquake Epicentres in a 24-hour Period. The stars marked the location of the UFO sightings or the earthquake epicentres. 96 In the second scenario, the same line could flip many degrees away from the first line. For such cases, the UFO clusters or earthquakes will be further away. This is shown in Figure 35 below. Figure 35: Orientation of UFO sightings or Earthquake Epicentres in a 24-hour Period. Note the wide angle between the two lines. Any changes in the angles of the two lines, whether a small or large angular shift, will cause the locations of the UFO sightings, or the earthquake epicentres, to shift reciprocally to form a new orientation line. The observation of this see-saw effect in the distribution pattern of UFO sightings and earthquake epicentres, could provide us with a useful tool to create a computer program with its corresponding algorithms and make it possible to predict earthquakes. With this observation, because we know the two modes in the line shift i.e., either a slight angular change or a major flip, it is possible to anticipate the formation of the next reciprocal line. Since we know where the fault lines are located, it would be easy to see where the new lines would cross and which fault line will be involved (Jamaludin 2019). Since the location of all seismic fault lines is known, then the shifting lines will indicate which fault line is the orientation line (the location of two earthquake epicentres which made the line) and will cross at that point in time. The point where the line intersects or crosses the fault, will be the location of the next quake. 97 And if the tremor took place, its epicentre coordinate will be right on the dot (the point where the line crossed the fault). And the epicentre of the earthquake, when determined by triangulation from three seismological stations, will also give the same precise result. If this happened it would be the first step in a major breakthrough in earthquake predictions. Since we are still at a loss to predict earthquakes using all the modern technological aids at our disposal, why not use this observation to determine the location of an impending earthquake? The simple guide on how to go about this is given in Appendix D. *** 98 Chapter 9 Meteors, Booms, the Sound of Explosions, UFOs and Earthquakes Some regions on this planet seem to offer a kind of sanctuary for meteors, UFOs, booms and other mysterious sounds. Perhaps unsurprisingly, other paranormal events also seem to occur in the same locations. Interestingly, these locations which attract meteors and UFOs are located either in seismic zones or close to them and earthquakes also occur in these areas. Meteors, UFOs and earthquakes all appear to be coming from the same source. From historical reports, a UFO-like flying object was sighted on October 3, 1843 in Europe. Several witnesses saw a cloud-like flying structure moving low in the sky. Some human-like beings were also seen with it. There were also rumbling sounds associated with the sighting. The same type of rumbling sound was heard again 150 years later on the other side of the planet. On November 30, 1994, according to witness reports, several fireball-type aerial objects were observed careering toward the earth in Duxi Forest, in Guizhou province in China. With them came a loud, rumbling sound that sounded like a moving train. The sound it made was described as deafening. The bright objects sighted were said to be made up of several fireballs. It appears that the objects did not reach the ground as no debris was recovered. However, their close approach to the ground caused considerable damage, because it cut through a long stretch of trees in the forest like a giant scythe. Curiously, some of the trees in the otherwise neatly cut area remained intact and the flaming aerial objects were never seen again. A much earlier event on August 18, 1783 documented a round luminous body that was seen entering the Earth's atmosphere over the North Sea. It passed over the east coast of Scotland and England down to the English Channel before breaking up over south-western France or northern Italy. As it appeared to split into several smaller bodies that followed the main mass, a rumbling noise was heard that sounded like thunder at a great distance. In another account as recorded in the Philosophical Transactions of the Royal 99 Society, which is the world’s first and longest-running scientific journal, a witness relates what was observed: "An oblong cloud moving more or less parallel to the horizon. Under this cloud could be seen a luminous object which soon became spherical, brilliantly lit, which came to a halt; this strange sphere seemed at first to be pale blue in colour but then its luminosity increased and soon it set off again towards the East. Then the object changed direction and moved parallel to the horizon before disappearing to the South-East; the light it gave out was prodigious; it lit up everything on the ground." This event does not appear to be a meteor. Between January 17, 1913 and February 8, 1913 there were a cluster of UFO sightings in Wales, United Kingdom. The UFO flap lasted for about 3 weeks. When this wave ended, it was the turn of the meteors to take over, not in Wales but further to the west. A chain of slow moving, large meteors were seen originating from the northwest heading to the southeast. They were sighted over North America, particularly in Canada, the North Atlantic and the South Atlantic. The meteors were particularly unusual in that there was no apparent radiant, that is to say, no point in the sky from which the meteors appeared to originate. A paper, published by the Royal Astronomical Society of Canada, notes that accounts of the number, appearance, and behaviour of the fireballs were “very discordant.” Some observers reported a dozen or fewer objects, while others claimed to have seen hundreds or even thousands. Some described the lighted objects as red in colour, while others described them as yellow. The orbs’ tails were likened to searchlights and streams of sparks. All of the witnesses reported hearing rumbling sounds loud enough to rattle windows On November 12, 1988, many people reported seeing a bright, purple-pink globe of light along the St. Lawrence River in Quebec. There were no rumbling sounds heard, but 11 days before that a powerful quake struck the area. During the Cross Sound earthquake of July 1, 1973, in Canada, which measured 6.7 on the Richter scale, a photo of seven yellowish unknown lights floating low beside a hill, was circulated widely as purported evidence of a UFO encounter. While some held to the notion that they were earthquake lights, the nature of the lights is reminiscent of UFOs rather than lights of a geophysical nature. On January 23, 1974, it was alleged that a UFO had crashed at Berwyn Mountain, 100 Wales, United Kingdom. When this UFO was sighted, an earthquake was felt in the area. In China in 1976, it was reported that a geologist took shelter after seeing some abnormal lights in the sky. This was later followed by the deadly Tangshan quake. However, no description was given as to the nature of the lights. It could either be earthquake lights or UFOs, after all both of these phenomena share the same space. During the 1979 Philippines UFO wave, as the flurry of UFO sightings in the central and southern Philippines was drawing to a close, a flaming object was sighted crashing to the ground. An explosion was heard by many villagers in the area. A search made by the local authorities failed to find any object. Was this a UFO, or just another meteor squeezing its way into the numerous UFO appearances at that time? On March 24, 1997 at 22:00 in the United Kingdom, on the Dark Peak, Howden Moor, two sonic booms were heard over the area. The RAF denied having any supersonic aircraft flying in the area at that time. An immediate search was carried out that night for a possible aircraft that had crashed. This involved helicopters and police sniffer dogs, along with 150 Mountain Rescue volunteers. No wreckage, however, was found. Witness reported sighting a triangularshaped UFO about an hour before the sonic boom was heard. Meteors do not cause earthquakes, but one particular incident over Michigan in January 2018 caused some excitement. A meteor streaking across the night sky was seen by many in Ohio, Michigan and Ontario, Canada. The fireball however exploded over southeast Michigan and caused a slight tremor of magnitude 2.0. Hundreds of people reported hearing a loud boom from the meteor and felt the ground shake. The epicentre of the low intensity tremor, picked up by the local seismological station, was calculated to be 5 miles west-southwest of New Haven, about 40 miles northeast of Detroit. However the seismic waves generated by these events were not from the meteor’s impact, but instead were sound waves generated in the atmosphere. The lead of NASA's Meteoroid Environment Office at the Marshall Space Flight Center in Huntsville, Alabama, explained that the pressure difference between the air in front of the meteor and the air behind it, caused the fireball to break apart and explode in the sky. The explosion generated shock waves that travelled down to the ground, where many residents heard a loud boom and felt the ground beneath them tremble. 101 It should be noted that seismometers were not designed to detect vibration in the air. The recorded magnitude 2.0 tremor came from the ground vibrations due to the explosive sound. In another incident, a bright ball of fire shot across the sky in Puerto Rico on January 17, 2020. Interestingly, the fireball was captured by a National Weather Service satellite at around 4:30 p.m. EST time as it exploded over the waters. Ten days earlier the island was wracked by a series of strong earthquakes, including a magnitude 6.4 tremor and dozens of aftershocks. The appearance of a bright ball of fire in the sky in the wake of these natural disasters spooked some residents. Is the appearance of the fireball somehow directly related to the series of earth tremors experienced in Puerto Rico at the time? Looking back in time, the most powerful earthquakes to hit the contiguous United States east of the Rocky Mountains in recorded history, was the 18111812 New Madrid earthquakes in the central Mississippi Valley. The earthquake started on December 16, 1811 with a magnitude of 8.1. In January 1812, two additional earthquakes of slightly lower magnitude of 7.4 and 7.8 were recorded. On February 7, 1812 another quake as high as 8.8 was registered in the area again. It was felt as far away as New York City, Boston, Montreal, and Washington D.C. From December 16, 1811 through March of 1812 there were over 2,000 earthquakes in the central Midwest, and between 6,000-10,000 earthquakes in the Bootheel of Missouri, where New Madrid is located near the junction of the Ohio and Mississippi Rivers. This quake, while being the largest in American history, exhibited other anomalies, such as generating the sound of distant thunder and loud explosions. There were also reports of lights flashing from the ground. This could be attributed the piezo-electric effect caused by quartz crystals being squeezed by geological stresses in the ground. This phenomenon is called ‘seismoluminescence’. The New Madrid earthquakes were preceded by the appearance of a great comet, which was visible around the globe for seventeen months. Incidentally, the comet was at its brightest during the earthquakes. The comet, with an orbit of 3,065 years, was last seen during the time of Ramses II in Egypt. While comets, meteors and earthquakes are unrelated events, their appearance during seismic tremors seem to indicate that it may not be coincidental. 102 These natural, celestial fireballs appearing at the same time as the earthquakes appears to be collateral in nature, with a possible common causative agent. In February 1946, Finland announced on Helsinki radio that an unusual number of meteors had been spotted in the northern district near the Arctic Circle. It looked as if the sky had opened up, or there had been some disturbance in the Asteroid Belt to account for the origin of these meteors. Perhaps significantly, several months later there was a wave of “ghost rockets” was reported in the Scandinavian countries. While rumbling sounds are usually associated with ground ruptures due to earthquakes, another type of sound: booms and explosions in the atmosphere seem to be caused by another physical process. UFOs, even though capable of accelerating faster than sound, do not produce sonic booms. In the United States, especially in the northeastern part, booms from unknown sources have been heard repeatedly over the years. The booms originated in the upper atmosphere, which cannot be explained citing man-made sources. Scientists can only speculate that these mysterious booms were probably caused by small, shallow, earthquakes. There are reports of a loud blast coming from the sky in San Diego, around 9:00 a.m. on April 4, 2006. Witnesses described the mysterious sounds as being like sonic booms, but there were no meteors reported, no explosions from a nearby marine base and no military aircraft were seen. On April 7, three days later, similar booms were heard in Mississippi and with other, similar reports also coming from Alaska, Alabama, and other states. In February 2010, on the same day that a huge earthquake struck the area, there were many reports of UFOs sightings in Chile. Then, on February 27, 2010, a magnitude 8.8 earthquake struck off the coast of central Chile. The tremor lasted for three minutes. It was felt strongly in six Chilean regions, from Valparaíso in the north to Araucanía in the south. On the same night, there were 15 sightings of anomalous flying objects in the same location. On Isla Robinson Crusoe, part of the Juan Fernandez Archipelago, many people witnessed an object emerge from the sea shortly before the earthquake struck. Three days later, in Iquique, Chile, several witnesses traveling on a bus saw a vertical cylindrical object resembling a fluorescent bulb, appear on the coast. At that same moment, a top-shaped structure, surrounded by lights, appeared out of the sea. Suddenly, the witnesses saw a long-armed, humanoid being measuring nearly three meters tall, walking towards the highway. 103 This caused a panic in the bus. Other nearby local residents witnessed the same event. Why do UFOs and earthquakes seems to be sharing the same space? Something just does not add up. Since the massive earthquake that stuck Chile on February 27, 2010 there have been a large number of UFO sightings over Chile. We cannot overlook the fact that UFOs and earthquakes are somehow related, so there is an urgent need to identify the common denominator. On April 14, 2010, a magnitude 6.9 earthquake struck western China's Qinghai province and 400 people were killed. Less than two months later, a series of UFO sightings occurred across the provinces of Hunan, Jiangsu, Shandong and Xinjiang. In the early evening of December 5, 2013, three mysterious explosions were heard in the coastal town of Tamsui, west of Taipei in northern Taiwan. The event left clear signals that were identified by the recordings of 12 regional seismometers and 3 infrasound sensors and processed by means of travel time analysis. The people of Tamsui, a town along the western coast of Taipei city in northern Taiwan, heard up to three thunderous explosions in quick succession. The source of the sounds, however, despite hours of search and inspection by the local authorities, the sounds remain unidentified. Taiwan is situated on a seismically active fault line in the South China Sea. A magnitude 2.7 earth tremor struck near Taiwan less than 24 hours before the loud booms were reported. On January 28, 2016, thousands of people from southern New Jersey to Long Island and coastal Connecticut felt the earth tremble. One witness at Brigantine reported that her home shook at 1:24 p.m. and again at 1:30 p.m. Residents there then felt a third, large tremor at about 2 p.m., and a smaller one 10 minutes later. People along New Jersey's eastern coast reported feeling at least six tremors. Between 1:20 pm and 2:40 pm, a seismic station near Hammonton, N.J., in the northeast section of the United States, picked up eight sonic booms. It picked up low-frequency sound below the range of human hearing, along with the ground shaking at different frequencies. The infrasound and seismic signals might have lasted about 10 seconds each, and produced 6-8 seconds of shaking felt by the public. There were no witness reports of any anomalous fireball in the sky. 104 The Air Force claimed that the event could be due to sonic booms from their aircraft. If that was the case, there should be many more such cases, but what occurred in January 2016 appears to be an isolated event. It must be coming from some unknown cause. In the 1800s there were no supersonic jets flying around, so the many booms which were recorded during that era must have been coming from some other source. On August 11, 1805, an explosive sound was heard in East Haddam, Connecticut. And on April 2 1808, in Piedmont, Italy a loud sound was heard and an earthquake was felt. On April 19, 1808, a meteor fell from the sky about 40 miles east of Piedmont. Sounds similar to cannon-shots were heard almost every day in this small region. Throughout the rest of the year earth tremors were registered in the region. As early as 1897, reports came from the village of Saline, Michigan describing a violent explosion coming from the sky. Witnesses to the north of the village reported sighting a large object moving rapidly to the west. During the Lisbon earthquake on February 2, 1816, a meteor was seen in the sky six hours after the tremor and extraordinary sounds were heard. On August 28, 1819, there was a violent earthquake in Irkutsk, Siberia, a few months earlier two meteors fell from the sky at the same spot. Why did the meteors choose the same location as that of the quake? Chance or coincidence? The same phenomenon recurred in the same location five years later when, on February 11, 1824, a slight earth tremor was felt and a few months later another meteor fell at Irkutsk. The historical records (Table 9 below), show that there are many instances of earthquakes, explosions and booms being heard and meteors were seen streaking across the sky or falling to the ground in the same area as the earthquakes. It is evident that something is not right. There must be a missing link between earthquakes and meteors. Table 9: Summary of UFOs, Earthquakes, Abnormal Sounds and Meteors from Historical Records to the Present Date August 18, 1783 Location North Sea Ground Event --- 1788 Comrie, Perthshire, Scotland Apt, France earthquakes October 8, 1803 Felt earth tremor 8 hours after meteor fall 105 Atmospheric Event Meteor & rumbling sounds Air concussions, no meteor seen Meteorite fall April 19, 1808 Piedmont, Italy Several tremors February 2, 1816 Lisbon Tremor August 21, 1816 earthquake August 28, 1819 Near Comrie, Scotland Irkutsk, Siberia February 11, 1824 May 17, 1830 October 23, 1839 February 18, 1841 October 3, 1843 Irkutsk, Siberia Perth, Scotland Comrie, Scotland Genoa, Italy Europe Slight tremor No tremor Violent quake Slight tremor --- October 8, 1857 Illinois 1897 Saline, Michigan Earthquake 4 hrs before air concussion --- February 1946 Finland --- October 7, 1962 Transvaal, South Africa --- October 20, 1962 Theunissen, South Africa Brooklyn Park, Australia --- October 27, 1964 violent earthquake Earth tremor July 1, 1973 January 23, 1974 May 1979 Canada Wales, UK Philippines Earthquake Earthquake --- November 12, 1988 November 30, 1994 Quebec, Canada Earthquake Guizhou province, China --- March 24, 1997 United Kingdom --- February 27, 2010 Chile Earthquake April 14, 2010 Qinghai province, China Northern Taiwan Earthquake December 5, 2013 Tremor 106 Meteor fall, cannonshot sounds heard Meteor in the sky, extraordinary sounds heard Luminous object or meteor seen Two meteors fell from the sky Meteor fall Meteorite fall Rattling sounds Fall of red substance UFO & rumbling sounds Luminous meteor, explosion Violent explosion in the sky. UFO sighted Unusual numbers of meteors & a series of UFO sightings “Fluorescent Light Bulb” followed by cannon booms, thunder-like Shiny object & White flash Flying saucer object sighted 20 minutes after tremor Unidentified lights Meteor/UFO Meteor & series of UFO sightings UFO sighted Several Fireballs & loud rumbling sounds Sonic booms & UFO sighting Series of UFO sightings Series of UFO sightings Three loud explosions January 28 , 2016 January 2018 January 17, 2020 December 24, 2020 New Jersey, Connecticut Michigan Puerto Rico Puerto Rico Tremor Several sonic booms Tremor Earthquake Earthquake Meteor Bright fireball UFO low over the ocean According to information from historical records and the modern era, the situation regarding earthquakes, upper air concussions, rumbling sounds and streaking or falling meteors have not changed. The repetitious nature of the events and with no plausible explanation forthcoming, we are left wondering why meteors choose to appear more often over earthquake areas than others. The sounds heard during the appearance of meteors, either could be caused by the meteor exploding, or its high velocity in the atmosphere resulting in sonic booms, or some other form of upper air concussion. On the other hand, earthquake sounds could be heard in several forms, such as distant thunder, explosions or the boom of distant artillery. Then there was the rough wind sound, like roaring or moaning, also sounds like the fall of heavy bodies, or loads of stones and even wagons or trains passing rapidly over hard ground. At the end of the year, on November 22, 2016, a blazing meteor was filmed burning its way across the sky, just after a huge earthquake of 7.4 magnitude plus a tsunami struck off the coast of Fukushima in Japan. It was a powerful earthquake, the largest earthquake in northeastern Japan since 2011 and several large aftershocks were felt the same day. The earthquake shook buildings in Tokyo, 150 miles southwest of the epicentre. Again we see an unrelated phenomenon making an unexpected appearance during a powerful earthquake. On the night of January 16, 2018, a meteor burst in the skies over Michigan, producing a fireball that was seen by people across seven U.S. states and in Ontario province in Canada. More than 600 sightings of the fireball were reported, along with reports of shaking and thunder-like rumbling. This meteor appeared at 8:09 p.m. local time in southeastern Michigan, where hundreds of people reported hearing a loud boom from the meteor and feeling the ground shake, according to the U.S. Geological Survey (USGS). Eyewitnesses in Hawaii reported seeing an unidentified flying object on the same day the earthquake struck on January 25, 2018. 107 There were two tremors which struck Hawaii at the same time. One quake measured 1.7 while the next one was a 2.0. To differentiate UFOs from earthquake lights, see the description of the light as reported by one witness - “There were long horizontal lights down each tube, the tubes seemed to have some thick ribs spaced quite a distance apart, joined together with something thinner and darker”. “Then as I was trying to see it clearly, it flashed. After the flash it got a brighter white and all the other lights on the tubes grew brighter to drown out any definition. The clouds then moved until it was covered completely.” Two days earlier in Alaska, a magnitude 7.9 earthquake was recorded in the Pacific Ocean at 12:32am about 170 miles southeast of Kodiak on January 23, 2018. Preceding this earthquake there was a large increase in the number of UFO sightings over the skies of Alaska. During the week of January 29, 2018, the Alaska Earthquake Center reported 956 earthquakes within the state. The largest earthquake was magnitude 5.0 and that occurred on January 31, 155 miles southeast of Kodiak. Earlier on April 16, 2008, Howard County 911 dispatchers were inundated with 146 phone calls when a boom was heard. One witness described the scenario as : “It's kind of weird because we heard a loud explosion, the lights moved and did their thing, and then they fell crashing down. The police are looking in fields and in homes with flashlights and they originally thought a plane crashed, but they can't find a plane?” In another event, on February 12, 2019, witnesses described seeing an apparent meteor streak across the skies of Florida, creating an other-worldly burst of green as it passed across the sky. Strange rumblings were detected, making it the first of its kind, with seismic activity, in the area since 2006. Seismic events are very rare in Florida as it is one of the least seismically active states in the USA. More than 3,000 residents from across the state, including Rockledge to Melbourne, felt tremors ranging from a 6.0 magnitude earthquake centred several hundred miles away in the Gulf of Mexico. Earthquakes, however, are a rare occurrence in the Sunshine State, which sits on a cushion of porous limestone and bedrock. In December 2019, a fireball lit up the skies above England, producing a tail made of fire which mesmerised witnesses. On December 5, 2019, a quake, with a magnitude of 3.2, was reported in Bridgewater and a number of towns and 108 villages across the county. The following month, nine more earthquakes were recorded in the UK. A year later in February 2020, a massive boom was heard by northern Arizona residents, which was believed to be most likely caused by a meteor explosion. This occurred in an active seismic region. The blast occurred around 7:20 a.m. Many residents initially believed the explosion to be an earthquake. People as far south as Chandler in Phoenix and as far north as Flagstaff, Arizona, reported seeing the meteor. It was first spotted near the Cordes Lakes area, traveling northwest, and last seen near Prescott. There are about 100 faults known to be active within Arizona’s borders with the majority of the earthquake activity occurring in the northern part of the state, although there are areas such as the southeastern (Safford, Duncan, Tucson), southwestern (Yuma) and central mountain region (Prescott, Mayer, Holbrook) that also have tremors. Most of the earthquake activity is located within 5-10 miles of known faults. Arizona earthquakes generally occur in an area stretching from the northnorthwestern to the southeastern part of the state seismic belt. A magnitude 2.5 earth tremor struck 412 km north of Phoenix, Arizona on February 16, 2020, the same day as the loud boom was heard. Note that the seismic fault line runs north-northwest to the southeast. Note also that the trajectory of the meteor was also moving in a northwest alignment with the fault line. On the morning of March 22, 2020, an earthquake of magnitude 5.3 hit Zagreb, Croatia, with its epicentre recorded 7 kilometres north of the city centre. A week later, a fireball appeared in the sky, it was so big and bright that it could be seen in Croatia, Italy and Austria. The small space rock entered the atmosphere above the northern Balkans at 10.34 a.m local time, with thousands witnessing the event. The explosion was so powerful that it literally shook the ground, leading many to fear that an earthquake was taking place. Not all meteor appearances are associated with earthquakes. In Aberdeenshire, Scotland, February 28, 2016, a meteor was caught on camera, there was a huge white flash and an explosion. No earthquake was detected in the region. On May 29, in West Yellowstone, Montana there were reports of around eleven earthquakes, the strongest one measured a magnitude of 3.1. The area had been hit by an additional 34 quakes the previous month. 109 At about the same time, a formation of a half a dozen flying lights were sighted at Pocatello, Idaho. The location of the cluster of earthquake epicentres in Montana is about 500 miles from Idaho with an orientation in the northeast direction. In April 2016, parts of Japan, mainly Kyushu, were jolted by several earth tremors. This quake injured thousands and killed dozens more. As we have seen, earthquakes tend to bring about UFO sightings in the area. True enough, a UFO was spotted and filmed the day before a 7.1-magnitude quake, which struck the Kumamoto area. One UFO showed up zipping past Kumamoto Airport on April 15, 2016. Also in Japan, many UFO sightings occurred at Fukushima during and after the earthquake and tsunami disaster of March 2011. No meteors were however reported over the area before or after the quake. Earthquakes and meteors are two unrelated phenomena. But when both occur within a small space and time, there should be a suspicion that some other factor must be in play. To use an analogy, if we open a farm gate perhaps a mix of cattle and goats would come running out, but during the time that the gate is open, unidentified cars also take advantage and pass through. Animals and automobiles are two different entities, but they appeared at the same moment. The common denominator for both was the gate. This seems to suggest that earthquakes and meteors, or possibly the upper air concussions of unknown origin may occur for a similar reason, as if a gate out in space was suddenly opened up. When the gate opens, a gust of energy bursts out, triggering earthquakes and at the same time it either throws out space rocks or perturbs celestial rocks in its vicinity. And it discharges UFOs too! While we are aware that plate tectonics and continental drift causes earthquakes, but the process is a slow one, so there must be some other driving force or stimuli that causes an instantaneous jolt to create a large earthquake. With the appearance of meteors, unknown explosive sounds in the upper atmosphere, the manifestation of UFOs and the occurrence of earthquakes, and all of them sharing the same space and time, the most plausible theory is that there must be an extraterrestrial source, probably close by, creating or contributing to all of these peculiar happenings. *** 110 Chapter 10 Are Large Earthquakes & Major UFO Waves Related? As mentioned earlier, UFOs and earthquakes are two non-identical events in nature and form. But because of the fact that UFOs and earthquakes seem to share the same space and time, there is a need to take a closer look at them. Based on documentation, there is about one major UFO wave occurring each year somewhere around the globe. When a major UFO wave occurs at a specific location, there are usually smaller pockets of UFO sightings being made in other areas as well. The number of sightings made or reported, the number of landings seen and the number of encounters with humanoid beings can be used as a criteria to differentiate between a major UFO wave and lesser intensity UFO clusters. Large earthquakes, measuring 8.0 or greater, also happen on average about once a year. Unlike earthquakes which are mainly distributed along the seismic belt known as the Ring of Fire, UFO waves adhere to the Great Circle route round the Earth. So we find that UFO waves usually cluster on the Great Circle lines. Large earthquakes do not occur in a similar pattern to UFO waves. Although it is noticeable that large earthquakes and major UFO waves both surge about once a year, however, their distribution patterns follow different paths. If UFOs and earthquakes are somehow related, the different ways in which they manifest, should still indicate some correlation. Let us take a look (see below) at the occurrence of global UFO waves to see if large earthquakes also follow the trends observed in major UFO waves. When a big quake occurs at a certain latitude and a UFO wave occurs, even though far away, but on or near the same latitude, it should raise some eyebrows as it indicates something is not right. Take for example the great Chilean earthquake of 1960; because on the other side of the globe, at about the same latitude, a UFO wave broke out in New Zealand. During the great 1964 Alaskan earthquake, a UFO wave struck the western part of the United States. During the 1965 Midwest UFO wave, there were some 111 seismic events to the northeast. A low magnitude 4.6 tremor struck eastern Missouri and affected a 160,000-square-mile area. Let us now take a look at how large earthquakes are distributed according to latitude. This approach is based on the assumption that if the cause of earthquakes originates from outside the Earth, then there should be a discernable pattern regarding where and when it would strike at certain latitudes. Figures 3639 show the trends observed for the period 1945 to1988. The criteria adopted is to use only the largest magnitude earthquakes recorded for each year. This was limited to magnitude 7.8 or greater. If there are two or more tremors registering with the same intensity, then a mid-point between the two latitudes was used. Figure 36: Occurrence of Large Earthquakes and Major UFO Waves According to Latitude from 1945 to 1955 1945 - 1955 80 Latitude 60 40 20 0 -20 45 46 47 48 49 50 1945 1946 1947 1948 1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 52 53 54 55 Year UFO Year 51 Earthquake UFO: Latitude EQ: EQ: UFO: Latitude/Magnitude Latitude Latitude/Region Interpolation Interpolation 48N/Europe 24N/8.1 59N/Sweden 53N/8.6 47N/NW USA --42N 14N/SE Asia 11N/7.8 -21N 53N/8.1 14S/Brazil 28N/8.6 -33N 23N/7.8 39N/USA 52N/9.0 -43N 34N/7.9 47N/France 37N/7.8 -49N --28N 112 During a 10-year period between 1945 and 1955, nine earthquakes measuring between 7.8 to 9.0 struck above the 10 degree north latitude. For a decade, no large earthquake above magnitude 7.8 was registered in the Southern Hemisphere. During this time, six of the known major UFO waves were also recorded above 10 degrees north latitude. Only one possible UFO wave was recorded in South America in 1950. For a three year period between 1945 and 1948, major UFO waves and large earthquakes were seen to follow the same trend. They shifted in latitude in tandem. After 1948, UFO waves dip to the southern latitudes while large earthquakes fluctuate up and down at the higher latitudes. For the period 1948 to 1955, large earthquakes follow the same pattern in the Northern Hemisphere. Major UFO waves on the other hand were seen to progress smoothly northwards between 1950 and 1955 . Between 1949 and 1955, the occurrence of large earthquakes and major UFO waves were not in sync. Both events appeared to detach and follow different courses. Figure 37: Occurrence of Large Earthquakes and Major UFO Waves According to Latitude from 1956 to 1966 1956 - 1966 80 60 Latitude 40 20 0 -20 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 -40 -60 Year UFO Earthquake 113 63 64 65 66 UFO: Latitude EQ: EQ: UFO: Latitude/Magnitude Latitude Latitude/Region Interpolation Interpolation 51N/Europe --40N 38N/NE USA 51N/8.6 36N/Japan -52N 6S/PNG 53N/8.0 43S/New 37S/9.5 Zealand -33S --10S 23S/Argentina --20S -5N 47N/8.5 34N/USA 61N/9.2 35N/Midwest 52N/8.7 USA 39N/NE USA 11S/8.1 Year 1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963 1964 1965 1966 Unlike the earlier period of 1945-1955, it is noticeable that both UFO waves and large earthquakes seem to follow the same trend in their latitudinal migration, but not in the same area. The fact that both exhibited the same pattern of moving from the Northern Hemisphere to the south between 1959 and 1962 and then migrated northwards between 1962 to 1965 suggests that there is a common underlying stimulus for both events. During the period, both major UFO waves and large earthquakes were apparently synchronised, with both progressing up and down the latitudes. For a duration of about 10 years, both events seem to follow each other. Figure 38: Occurrence of Large Earthquakes and Major UFO Waves According to Latitude form 1967 to 1977 1967 - 1977 60 Latitude 40 20 0 -20 67 68 69 70 71 -40 72 73 Year UFO Earthquake 114 74 75 76 77 UFO: Latitude EQ: EQ: UFO: Latitude/Magnitude Latitude Latitude/Region Interpolation Interpolation 53N/England --12N 40N/Spain 36N/8.2 -22N 36N/7.8 5N/Malaysia 2S/8.0 -14S 4S/8.1 34S/South 8N/8.0 Africa 30N/SE USA 1N -32N 1N 34N/USA 6S/7.9 -43N 30S/8.0 52N/Wales 10S/8.3 Year 1967 1968 1969 1970 1971 1972 1973 1974 1975 1976 1977 Figure 39: Occurrence of Large Earthquakes and Major UFO Waves According to Latitude form 1978 to 1988 1978 - 1988 70 60 50 Latitude 40 30 20 10 0 -10 78 79 80 81 82 -20 83 84 85 86 87 88 Year UFO Earthquake The period of 1967 to 1977 saw the same break in synchronicity observed earlier. For a three year period between 1967 and 1969, both UFO waves and large earthquakes occurred between 12–53 North latitudes. In 1970 both events took a plunge southward between 5 degrees north and 2 degrees south latitudes. During the 1971–1972 period, UFO waves occurred in the southern latitudes (14 –34 degrees south) and major earthquakes maintained their lower latitude position between 1971 – 1975, over a range of 8 degrees North to 6 degrees south. 115 The overall picture for the years 1970 to 1977, indicates that both events took an opposite trend. Generally speaking, both UFO waves and large earthquakes were out of sync, in the sense that they did not follow or imitate each other in their latitudinal distribution. If they share a common cause, it appears that they were not synchronised for this period of 10 years. Year UFO: Latitude 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 42N/Italy 8N/Philippines ----14S/NE Brazil ----10S/Brazil --55N/UK 51N/Belgium UFO: Latitude Interpolation 1N 7S 13S 11S 23N EQ: Latitude/Magnitude --2S/8.2 12S/7.9 --------8S/8.0 51N/8.0 59N/7.9 57N/7.8 EQ: Latitude Interpolation 6S 15S/7.7 10S 5S/7.6 10S/7.6 If the period 1967 to 1977 showed that major UFO waves and large earthquakes were not synchronised, however, the period of 1978 to 1988 saw that they were back on track. Something must cause this effect about every 20 years. In 1978, a UFO wave occurred in Italy, there was however, no large earthquake recorded that year. The UFO wave trend started from 42 degrees north latitude, then progressed southwards to the Philippines in 1979 and by 1982 clustered around Northeast Brazil. In 1985, another UFO wave occurred again in Brazil. No wave was recorded in 1987, but there was a spate of UFO sightings in the United Kingdom. By December 1988, a UFO wave was reported over Belgium. We can see that UFO waves migrated southwards from 1979 till 1985. After 1985, both UFO waves and large earthquakes had shifted to the Northern Hemisphere. Starting from 1979 to 1988, major UFO waves and large earthquakes appear to be synchronised as both events are moving up and down the latitudes in tandem. 116 In summation, the period 1945 till 1955 represents a period of 10 years whereby UFO waves and large earthquakes appear not to be synchronised. Both events take different paths. But between, 1956 and 1966, it seems that both events are synchronised again. However, in the next 10 year period, 1967 till 1977, they are both thrown out of sync. Order prevailed for the next 10 year period, 1978 till 1988, when UFO waves and large earthquakes were synchronised again. This behaviour clearly shows that both major UFO waves and large earthquakes are being regulated by a third party. This is further strenghtened by the fact that the Sun’s magnetic pole reversal works according to the same principle. From 1989 till 1999, it is not possible to plot the latitude of UFO waves, as there were only five known UFO waves. Interpolation cannot be done as the 3 to 4 year gap between UFO waves is too great. After 2002, the occurrence of major UFO waves virtually ceased altogether While the reporting of UFO sightings got better and more numerous from the year 2000 onwards, however, the documentation of major UFO waves has been slowing down. This could either be due to the fact that the phenomenon is in fact reducing or there has been no proper reporting and evaluation of the reports. The former option appears to be the more likely of the two. In 2000, a major UFO wave broke out in Chile. This wave continued into 2001 involving Brazil as well. By 2002 it had affected Argentina. After 2002, there has been no more documentation of any UFO waves, this continued right up until 2020. It is notable that, as if replacing the large waves, that there have been numerous small clusters of UFO sightings made across the globe. In April 2004 there was a spate of UFO sightings in Iran, in August 2005 there were several reports in northern Norway, in April 2007 there were reports of black, triangular flying objects in the West Midlands in the United Kingdom and in January 2008 there was some notable UFO activity in the United States. A surge of UFO sightings appeared in 2010 in several locations around the globe. Early in the year, in February there was an explosion of UFO sightings all over Chile. The flurry of UFO sightings in Chile coincided with a powerful magnitude 8.8 earthquake on February 27, 2010, which occurred off the coast of south-central Chile. It caused widespread damage on land and initiated a tsunami that devastated some coastal areas of the country. 117 In July 2010 several UFOs were spotted in eastern China and by October, a spate of UFO sightings flared up over Mongolia. The April 14, 2010 Yushu earthquake measuring 6.9 is probably related to the spate of sightings made in China. According to the theory of plate tectonics, it usually takes years for the plates to move. They are interlocked with each other and then break or slide due to stress and pressure. Looking at the yearly occurrence of large magnitude earthquakes, there appears to be an external force present that initiated a push to cause the plate collision. The evidence that the primary triggering mechanism for both earthquakes and UFOs could possibly originate from an extra-solar coordinate can be seen in how large earthquakes and major UFO waves are distributed in time and space according to latitude. Comparing the four periods, 1945 until 1955, 1956 until 1966, 1967 until 1977 and 1978 until 1988, we can clearly see a pattern of shifting latitudes for UFO waves and large earthquakes. Only a single common cause could cause the same effect for two different types of event. To recap; the observation that the 1945 until 1955 period showed that the two trends, earthquakes and UFOs, were not in sync. For the period following it, 1956 until 1966, the two events seems to be in sync. But for the next period, 1967 until 1977, the phenomenon was out of sync again. It returned to synchronization again for the 1978 until 1988 time period. The observed period of 43 years showed that both large earthquakes and UFO waves seems to synchronize every 21.5 years! (The actual figure could possibly be 22 years). Interestingly, the Sun’s magnetic field synchronizes itself every 22 years. Every 11 years its magnetic poles flip but return to their original position every 22 years. When large earthquakes and UFO waves are both synchronised every 21 to 22 years and the Sun’s magnetic poles do the same, this provides the best evidence that there is an unknown third party involved. With the observed trend that large earthquakes and UFO waves follow a pattern of “ascending and descending” the latitudes, it is evident that both events are somehow tied together. Only an external source, presumably a body outside the Earth and the Sun and possessing the correct physical properties, could trigger all three events (UFOs, 118 earthquakes and the Sun’s magnetic pole reversal) in an identical, synchronized 22-year cycle. *** 119 Chapter 11 Earthquakes in Sumatra, UFOs in Malaysia – The Search for a Connection There have been no major earthquakes recorded in Malaysia to date. Some slight tremors however are occasionally felt in Peninsular Malaysia as a result of seismic activity in the nearby island of Sumatra, Indonesia. For West Malaysia on the island of Borneo, there were several recorded earth tremors felt in the Kudat, Ranau, Lahad Datu and Kota Kinabalu regions, when an earthquake struck closeby in the South China Sea. Generally speaking, we can say that Malaysia is an earthquake-free country. However, it should be noted that there are four inactive or dormant local fault zones that displayed no seismic activity until only recently. These semi-active fault lines are situated in the Bukit Tinggi region of Peninsular Malaysia. The other three dormant areas are at Kuala Lumpur, Lepar in the state of Pahang and Seremban in Negeri Sembilan. There is possibly another one in Jerantut. It has been noted on numerous occasions that when a UFO was reportedly seen in Peninsular Malaysia, there was usually an earthquake in Sumatra. And sometimes vice-versa, when an earth tremor was felt in Peninsular Malaysia, there was bound to be a UFO sighting somewhere in the country. These observations had raised a suspicion over the years, that seismic events in Sumatra are somehow related to UFO appearances in Malaysia. And globally, as noted by many UFO researchers, UFOs and earthquakes somehow appear to be related. Unfortunately, over the years the link was not found. It has been observed that no regions of the world are free from the UFO phenomenon. Only the number of sightings varies from country to country. Some countries generate a low number of reports, which could be due to a lack of interest, or there are no suitable groups to report to. Another significant factor in the low number of reports could also be due to the region being outside the seismic zone. Studies made by Persinger and Lefreniere (1977), showed that 70% of UFO sighting reports were made in seismic areas and are directly related to earthquakes. This indicates that UFOs and earthquakes could be connected. 120 Persinger and Lefreniere, however, stipulated that the presence of electromagnetic waves due to seismic ground stress resulted in human witnesses claiming to see UFOs and their occupants. In other words it is all in their minds. And there are reports of strange lights in the form of balls of lights, which were actually earthquake lights, the product of the piezo-electric effects of quartz rocks being compressed. While some anomalous lights were attributed to earthquake lights, there are a high percentage of reports which do not suggest that they were earthquake lights. There must be some other explanation to it. There should, however, be a clear distinction between UFOs and earthquake lights, as earthquake lights are certainly not UFOs (refer to Chapter 2). They are short lived events which lack the solid-looking structures usually described in UFO reports. Earthquake lights do not have lighted window-like structures and do not respond to the presence of human beings. In Malaysia, with the absence of any major earthquakes and the low number of UFO sighting reports, the situation presents an ideal opportunity to see whether there is any relationship between the UFO sightings recorded in Malaysia and the earthquakes that occurred in nearby Sumatra in Indonesia. The presence of the narrow stretch of water called the Straits of Malacca acts as a dividing line between Sumatra Island and Peninsular Malaysia, making the two areas uniquely suitable to see whether earthquakes and UFO sightings are somehow related. Table 10 below correlates the occurrence of earth tremors in nearby Sumatra Island, Indonesia and the reported sightings of UFOs made in Peninsular Malaysia. Since there are numerous monthly seismic upheavals in Sumatra, we correlate the date of the Malaysian UFO sightings with the nearest date and epicentre to the Sumatran earthquakes. There were a total of 218 UFO sightings made in Malaysia between 1977 and 2020. During this period, there were 184 seismic events recorded in Sumatra Island and 8 from Nicobar Islands (India) in conjunction with the Malaysian UFO sightings. When there were no earthquake in Sumatra, the nearest epicentre which was located in nearby Nicobar Islands was used, as it is quite near Northern Malaysia. In Table 10 below, the time difference between the date of the earthquake and the UFO sighting is written as 1-B for before the quake or 1-A after the tremor. 121 Table 10: Possible Association Between Earthquakes in Sumatra and UFO sightings in Peninsular Malaysia. Date Oct. 13, 1977 Jan 27, 1978 Jan 3, 1979 Earthquake (a) Epicentre Time UTC Mag. Date Nicobar Islands 9.458°N 93.794°E 2118 5.1 Nicobar Islands 8.115°N 94.024°E Northern Sumatra 1.474°N 99.027°E 1940 1944 Feb 5, 1979 Nias Region 0.371°N 96.818°E 0535 April 19, 1979 Kepulauan Mentawai region 1.244°S 98.129°E 0720 May 19, 1979 Southern Sumatra 1.077°S 100.958°E 2234 May 28, 1979 Southern Sumatra 1.931°S 100.399°E Kepulauan Mentawai 1902 Aug 8, 1981 UFO Sighting (b) Location Time UTC Oct. 10, 1977 Kuala Lumpur 0200 Oct. 11, 1977 Penang --- 2-B 4.7 Jan 27, 1978 Penang 1345 1-B 748 113 4.3 Jan 2, 1979 Butterworth 1015 1-B 475 19 Jan 4, 1979 Jitra 2245 1-A 556 16 5.4 Feb 7, 1979 Penang 0230 2-A 452 17 5.4 April 20, 1979 Kg Pertama, Penang 1100 1-A 781 19 May 19, Bukit Mertajam 1979 0700 1-B 715 356 May 26, Kulim 5.3717° N, 1979 0030 2-B 810 112 123 0 1-B 537 40 5.4 5.1 3.1390° N, 101.6869° E 5.3673° N, 100.2486° E 5.3673° N, 100.2486° E 5.4380° N, 100.3882° E 6.2644° N, 100.4202° E 5.3673° N, 100.2486° E 5.3890° N, 100.4223° E 5.3655° N, 100.4590° E Time Diff. Bet. (a) & (b) DAY 3-B Dist. Bet. (a) & (b) KM Orientat ion (Deg) 1,118 128 842 121 100.5553° E 2137 4.7 Aug 7, 1981 122 Skudai 1.4927° region 2.217°S 100.602°E Northern Sumatra 3.374°N 96.271°E 1417 4.4 Sept 22, Northern 1983 Sumatra 5.484°N 94.604°E 0527 4.5 March 7, 1985 Southern Sumatra 2.566°S 101.991°E 1555 4.6 March 21, 1985 Nicobar Islands 6.242°N 94.727°E 0748 5.0 July 25, 1986 Northern Sumatra 4.734°N 95.106°E 1717 4.3 Feb 15, 1987 Northern Sumatra 5.272°N 94.461°E 0314 4.2 March 25, 1987 Northern Sumatra 3.166°N 96.292°E 0607 4.9 April 20, 1987 off the west coast of northern Sumatra 4.784°N 94.440°E Kepulauan Mentawai 1243 4.3 1438 4.9 Jan 26, 1982 Feb 15, 1988 N, 103.7414 °E Jan 24, Ipoh 1982 4.5975° N, 101.0901 °E Sept 22, Tikam 1983 Batu 5.5872° N, 100.4419 °E March Sungai 7, 1985 Gawi 5.0738° N, 103.0127 °E March Parit 13, Buntar 1985 5.1474° N, 100.4212 °E July 27, Kerteh 1986 4.5079° N, 103.4430 °E Feb 15, Ampang 1987 3.1563 N, 101.7348 E March Pekan, 25, Pahang 1987 3.4921° N, 103.3895 °E April Pekan, 19, Pahang 1987 3.4921° N, 103.3895 °E Feb 14, Sg 1988 Petani 123 223 8 2-B 551 76 140 0 1-A 647 89 203 0 1-A 851 7.5 223 0 8-B 643 101 130 0 2-A 925 91 235 6 1-A 841 106 150 0 1-A 790 87 150 0 1-A 100 4 98 222 3 1-B 856 1 region 2.102°S 100.352°E May 28, 1988 Northern Sumatra 4.551°N 95.040°E 1941 4.3 Nov 17, 1988 Northern Sumatra 3.453°N 95.799°E 1336 4.6 Oct 14, 1989 Northern Sumatra 2.725°N 98.933°E 1349 4.6 Aug 16, 1990 Northern Sumatra 4.289°N 95.448°E 1426 4.9 Sept 26, Nicobar 1990 Islands 6.414°N 93.978°E 0437 4.8 Aug 31, 1991 Northern Sumatra 5.267°N 95.465°E 2303 4.3 June 14, 1992 Northern Sumatra 4.820°N 94.265°E 1041 5.0 Feb 11, 1994 Northern Sumatra 4.831°N 95.184°E 0756 5.0 5.6436° N, 100.4894 °E May 29, Muar 1988 2.0631° N, 102.5849 °E Nov 11, Kuala 1988 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Oct 8, Sg 1989 Petani 5.6436° N, 100.4894 °E Aug 7, Sitiawan 1990 4.2168° N, 100.6978 °E Sept 28, Port 1990 Kelang 2.9999° N, 101.3928 °E Aug 31, Pasir 1991 Gudang 1.4703° N, 103.9030 °E June 7, Kota 1992 Kuala Muda 5.5868° N, 100.3759 °E Feb 3, Sg 1994 Petani 5.6436° N, 100.4894 124 133 0 1-A 880 108 -- 6-B 654 93 121 0 6-B 366 28 143 0 9-B 581 91 --- 2-A 905 115 043 0 1-B 102 1 113 224 5 7-B 682 82 140 0 8-B 594 81 0634 4.2 Sept 23, Southern 1995 Sumatra 5.561°S 104.062°E 1605 6.0 Sept 24, Northern 1995 Sumatra 3.463°N 97.273°E 2019 5.1 Oct 8, 1995 Northern Sumatra 5.853°N 94.815°E 1529 4.7 Oct 12, 1995 Northern Sumatra 2.874°N 97.336°E 0043 4.2 Oct 22, 1995 Southwest Sumatra 6.404°S 98.668°E 1954 5.7 Nov 14, 1995 Southern Sumatra 3.682°S 101.924°E 0632 5.1 Nov 22, 1995 West Coast Northern Sumatra 3.090°N 95.915°E Southern Sumatra 3.063°S 1327 5.8 0038 4.5 April 28, 1995 Nov 27, 1995 Northern Sumatra 2.407°N 99.141°E °E May 1, Kuantan 1995 3.7634° N, 103.2202 °E Sept 15, Kg 1995 Tanjung Sepat 2.6733° N, 101.5682 °E Sept 25, Kg 1995 Tanjung Sepat 2.6733° N, 101.5682 °E Oct 11, Penang 1995 5.3673° N, 100.2486 °E Oct 16, Kg 1995 Tanjung Sepat 2.6733° N, 101.5682 °E Oct 24, Mengkarak 3.3295° 1995 N, 102.4193 °E Mengkarak Nov 16, 3.3295° 1995 N, 102.4193 °E Nov 19, Gopeng 1995 4.4717° N, 101.1654 °E Nov 28, Ipoh 1995 4.5975° N, 125 150 0 4-A 492 71 210 0 9-B 950 343 130 0 1-A 484 100 133 5 3-A 605 95 210 0 4-A 470 93 210 0 2-A 115 4 21 210 0 2-A 778 4 140 0 3-B 603 75 110 0 1-A 856 351 102.279°E Dec 14, 1995 Northern Sumatra 2.988°N 99.323°E 1357 4.1 Dec 16, 1995 Jan 12, 1996 Southwest of Sumatra 6.452°S 103.744°E 2343 4.3 Jan 12, 1996 Jan 13, 1996 Jan 14, 1996 Jan 15, 1996 Jan 15, 1996 Jan 15, 1996 Feb 17, 1996 Northern Sumatra 4.253°N 96.592°E 0138 3.8 Feb 21, 1996 Feb 26, 1996 126 101.0901 °E Kampar 4.3085° N, 101.1537 °E Labis 2.3823° N, 103.0201 °E Labis 2.3823° N, 103.0201 °E Labis 2.3823° N, 103.0201 °E Bukit Gambir 2.2158° N, 102.6592 °E Labis 2.3823° N, 103.0201 °E Lingga, Muar 1.3547° N, 111.1702 °E Yong Peng 2.0120° N, 103.0582 °E Gemas 2.5816° N, 102.6125 °E 110 0 2-A 250 54 122 5 1-B 978 355 133 0 1-A 978 355 180 0 2-A 978 355 120 0 3-A 967 353 124 5 3-A 978 355 123 0 3-A 949 352 153 0 4-A 760 109 131 0 17A 693 105 May 24, 1996 Nias Region 0.470°N 97.585°E 0258 4.1 Jan 13, 1997 Northern Sumatra 0.486°N 99.225°E 0626 4.3 March 15, 1998 Northern Sumatra 4.222°N 95.756°E 1931 4.4 Oct 29, 1998 Northern Sumatra 1.191°N 99.348°E 0757 4.5 Feb 16, 1999 off the west coast of northern Sumatra 3.289°N 95.467°E Northern Sumatra 4.804°N 96.060°E 0937 4.3 2145 3.8 May 13, 1999 May 21, 1999 Northern Sumatra 1.566°N 99.816°E 0104 4.1 May 23, Sg 1996 Petani 5.6436° N, 100.4894 °E Jan 18, Sikamat 1997 2.7609° N, 101.9910 °E Alor March 12, Setar 1998 6.1263° N, 100.3672 °E Oct 21, Kuala 1998 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Feb 16, Rompin 1999 2.8006° N, 103.4861 °E May 19, Kupang 1999 5.6310° N, 100.8459 °E May 20, Ipoh 1999 4.5975° N, 101.0901 °E May 23, Kg 1999 Bemban Hilir 2.6522° N, 101.9243 °E May 24, Padang 1999 Terap 6.2568° N, 127 190 0 1-B 656 29 121 5 5-A 398 51 123 0 3-B 553 67 140 0 7-B 337 50 143 0 1-A 894 93 212 0 6-A 538 80 110 0 7-A 558 92 203 0 2-A 268 62 140 0 3-A 450 10 May 27, 1999 Off the west coast of northern Sumatra 3.965°N 95.593°E 0638 Off West Coast Northearn Sumatra 4.692°N 94.634°E off the west coast of northern Sumatra 3.499°N 95.013°E Nicobar Islands 9.115°N 93.078°E 0901 4.3 2302 4.9 2050 4.1 Feb 18, 2000 Northern Sumatra 3.754°N 97.929°E 1030 4.1 March 3, 2000 Northern Sumatra 5.295°N 96.067°E 0121 4.6 June 11, 2000 Southern Sumatra 5.029°S 102.152°E 2229 5.3 Aug 23, 2000 Southern Sumatra 1312 4.2 July 5, 1999 July 22, 1999 Dec 25, 1999 4.7 100.6110 °E May 26, Baling --1999 5.6755° N, 100.9168 °E May 26, Petaling --1999 Jaya 3.1279° N, 101.5945 °E July 9, Jitra 010 1999 6.2644° 5 N, 100.4202 °E 145 Salak 1 Tinggi 2.7968° N, 101.7424 °E Dec 26, Langkawi 183 6.3500° 1999 0 N, 99.8000° E Feb 14, Ipoh 152 2000 4.5975° 5 N, 101.0901 °E Kg 190 March 0 4, 2000 Gobek 5.7293° N, 102.1048 °E June 11, Kuala --2000 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E --Aug 23, Kuala 2000 Lumpur July 31, 1999 128 1-B 619 72 1-B 679 98 4-A 646 70 9-A 753 96 1-A 799 112 4-B 362 75 1-A 670 86 1-B 905 357 1-A 783 360 3.971°S 101.703°E Sept 1, 2000 Nias Region 1.438°N 96.591°E 1156 6.0 Sept 1, 2000 Oct 15, 2000 off the west coast of northern Sumatra 4.278°N 94.948°E Off West Coast Northern Sumatra 4.278°N 94.948°E 2345 4.6 Oct 14, 2000 2345 4.6 Nias Region 0.963°N 98.997°E 2205 Oct 15, 2000 Oct 21, 2000 4.7 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Ampang 123 3.1563° 0 N, 101.7348 °E Kuantan --3.7634° N, 103.2202 °E 1-A 605 72 1-B 934 93 Oct 20, 2000 Ampang 1540 5-A 3.1563° N, 101.7348 °E 767 99 Oct 20, 2000 Puchong 3.0327° N, 101.6188 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Cheras 3.1068° N, 101.7259 °E Setapak 3.2791° N, 101.7410 °E Subang Jaya 3.0567° N, 101.5851 °E Gopeng 4.4717° Oct 21, 2000 Oct 22, 2000 Oct 26, 2000 Southern Sumatra 5.331°S 102.573°E 0333 4.8 Oct 28, 2000 Dec 4, 2000 Northern Sumatra 1.436°N 99.074°E 0754 5.2 Dec 7, 2000 Jan 21, 2001 Southern Sumatra 2303 4.4 Jan 22, 2001 129 --- 5-A 753 100 1700 1-B 384 51 2200 1-A 386 53 2150 2-A 954 354 1540 3-A 333 57 1430 1-A 103 7 350 4.785°S 102.727°E Jan 25, 2001 Southern Sumatra 5.911°S 103.767°E 0649 5.3 Jan 28, 2001 Southern Sumatra 5.001°S 102.673°E 1853 4.6 Jan 30, 2001 Southern Sumatra 5.921°S 103.768°E 0246 5.0 Feb 7, 2001 Southern Sumatra 4.534°S 102.476°E 0838 4.2 Feb 15, 2001 Southern Sumatra 4.784°S 102.761°E 1446 5.3 May 24, 2001 Northern Sumatra 4.084°N 95.153°E 2347 4.1 0652 4.5 Sept 26, Southern 2001 Sumatra 5.487°S 104.272°E 0051 4.7 Feb 3, 1914 4.1 Sept 6,, 2001 Northern Sumatra 5.990°N 95.090°E Southern N, 101.1654 °E Jan 25, Penang 2001 5.3673° N, 100.2486 °E Jan 28, Penang 5.3673° 2001 N, 100.2486 °E Jan 31, Penang 2001 5.3673° N, 100.2486 °E Feb 7, Pt Klang 2001 2.9999° N, 101.3928 °E Feb 15, Selangor 2001 3.0738° N, 101.5183 °E May 20, Baling 2001 5.6755° N, 100.9168 °E May 21, Kuala 2001 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Sept 2, Ipoh 2001 4.5975° N, 101.0901 °E Sept 29, Ipoh 2001 4.5975° N, 101.0901 °E Feb 2, Johor 130 1230 1-A 130 6 342 --- 1-B 117 8 347 1545 1-A 130 6 343 --- 1-A 841 352 --- 1-B 883 352 1200 4-B 663 74 --- 3-B 733 98 1245 4B 682 103 --- 3-A 117 0 342 --- 1-B 456 52 2002 Sumatra 1.016°S 100.483°E Feb 3, 2002 Southern Sumatra 1.016°S 100.483°E 2002 1914 4.1 Feb 11, 2002 Northern Sumatra 4.354°N 95.872°E 0829 4.6 Feb 18, 2002 Northern Sumatra 5.206°N 94.163°E 1743 4.2 April 9, 2002 Northern Sumatra 4.721°N 96.182°E 1935 4.5 May 2, 2002 Northern Sumatra 1.052°N 99.162°E 1147 4.7 Aug 10, 2002 Northern Sumatra 1.040°N 100.237°E 1641 4.4 Sept 9, 2002 Northern Sumatra 0.365°N 99.242°E 1827 4.5 Bahru 1.4927° N, 103.7414 °E Feb 4, Johor 2002 Bahru 1.4927° N, 103.7414 °E Feb 4, Johor 2002 Bahru 1.4927° N, 103.7414 °E Feb 15, Penang 2002 5.3673° N, 100.2486 °E Feb 19, Penang 2002 5.3673° N, 100.2486 °E April Sg 10, Petani 2002 5.6436° N, 100.4894 °E May 1, Kuala Lumpur 2002 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Aug 11, Petaling Jaya 2002 3.1279° N, 101.5945 °E Sept 13, Shah 2002 Alam 3.0733° N, 101.5185 131 0130 1-A 456 52 1430 1-A 456 52 1245 4-A 499 77 1400 1-A 675 88 1400 1-A 489 78 --- 1-B 363 50 --- 1-A 276 34 --- 4-A 391 40 4.8 Nov 12, 2002 Nov 12, 2002 Simeulue 2.921°N 96.332°E 1746 Nov 13, 2002 Northern Sumatra 3.006°N 96.087°E 1553 5.6 Nov 15, 2002 Nov 27, 2002 Simeulue 2.849°N 96.110°E 1627 4.7 Nov 26, 2002 Jan 19 2003 Southern Sumatra 3.428°S 101.638°E 0255 5.1 Jan 17, 2003 Jan 22, 2003 Northern Sumatra 4.495°N 97.568°E 0258 5.7 Jan 21, 2003 Feb 2, 2003 Northern Sumatra 4.001°N 95.425°E 0617 5.2 Feb 1, 2003 Feb 1, 2003 Feb 1, 2003 Feb 2, 2003 Northern Sumatra 1.674°N 98.341°E 2016 4.1 Feb 2, 2003 132 °E Penang 5.3673° N, 100.2486 °E Alor Gajah 2.3822° N, 102.2116 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Skudai 1.5344° N, 103.6594 °E Bkt Kayu Hitam 6.5097° N, 100.4204 °E Penang 5.3673° N, 100.2486 °E Skudai 1.5344° N, 103.6594 °E Raub 3.7899° N, 101.8570 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 0300 1-B 512 58 1415 2-A 684 96 --- 1-B 621 87 1530 2-B 592 22 1400 1-B 387 55 1645 1-B 554 74 1130 1-B 957 106 --- 1-B 716 92 1500 1-B 404 66 4.3 Feb 3, 2003 Northern Sumatra 4.370°N 97.766°E 1213 May 27, 2003 Northern Sumatra 2.756°N 99.197°E 0946 4.7 June 14, 2003 Simeulue 2.710°N 96.538°E 1258 4.3 June 26, 2003 Northern Sumatra 5.096°N 94.300°E 1305 4.9 July 26, 2003 Northern Sumatra 3.867°N 95.293°E 2059 4.6 July 26, 2003 Northern Sumatra 3.867°N 95.293°E 2059 4.6 Dec 11, 2003 Northern Sumatra 1.268°N 98.715°E 0306 4.8 Feb 24, 2003 Northern Sumatra 0.993°N 99.032°E 2020 4.2 April 8, 2004 Northern Sumatra 5.305°N 96.200°E 0608 4.2 °E Feb 3, Puchong 2003 3.0327° N, 101.6188 °E May 24, Melaka 2003 2.1896° N, 102.2501 °E June 13, Petaling 2003 Jaya 3.1279° N, 101.5945 °E June 23, Kuala 2003 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E July 23, Kupang 2003 5.6310° N, 100.8459 °E July 31, Bagan 2003 Lalang 2.6059° N, 101.6983 °E Dec 16, Baling 2003 5.6755° N, 100.9168 °E Feb 25, Kuala 2004 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E April 8, Kuala 2004 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 133 1752 1-A 452 109 1448 3-B 345 101 2200 1-B 570 85 1510 3-B 849 105 1000 3-B 646 72 --- 4-A 726 101 --- 5-A 545 26 2300 1-A 378 51 1050 1-A 654 111 4.2 April 29, 2004 Northern Sumatra 2.584°N 100.700°E 0950 May 13, 2004 Nias Region 0.220°N 97.602°E 0718 4.5 May 18, 2004 Nicobar Islands 7.314°N 93.572°E 0258 5.0 Oct 7, 2004 Northern Sumatra 2.023°N 97.073°E 1332 4.4 Jan 2, 2005 Northern Sumatra 4.776°N 95.198°E 0401 4.8 April 3, 2005 Northern Sumatra 1.806°N 99.449°E 0200 4.4 June 9, 2005 Off West Coast Northern Sumatra 4.295°N 93.403°E Nias Region 0.402°N 96.844°E 0410 4.7 0925 4.2 Off West Coast Northern Sumatra 2.429°N 2214 4.1 June 18, 2005 June 21, 2005 April 21, 2004 °E 2145 8-B 138 84 1900 1-B 549 55 1230 1-B 105 4 120 1200 3-A 526 76 1350 1-A 653 92 1200 1-B 562 48 1130 1-B 942 93 0800 1-B June 18, Johor 2005 Bahru 1.4927° N, 103.7414 °E June 22, Seberang 1130 1-A 2005 Jaya 5.3819° N, 100.3989 779 81 768 65 Seremban 2.7259° N, 101.9378 °E May 12, Petaling 2004 Jaya 3.1279° N, 101.5945 °E May 17, Port 2004 Dickson 2.5225° N, 101.7963 °E Oct 10, Selangor 2004 3.0738° N, 101.5183 °E Jan 2, Ipoh 2005 4.5975° N, 101.0901 °E April 2, Marang 2005 5.2096° N, 103.2049 °E June 8, Raub 2005 3.7954° N, 101.8594 °E 134 July 22, 2005 94.159°E Nias Region 1.179°N 97.134°E 2012 4.5 Nov 11, 2005 Northern Sumatra 5.056°N 94.329°E 2046 4.5 Nov 12, 2005 Northern Sumatra 4.689°N 95.165°E 0811 4.2 Jan 1, 2006 Northern Sumatra 4.649°N 96.816°E 0203 4.4 Jan 29, 2006 Nias Region 1.697°N 96.030°E 2201 3.6 Feb 2, 2006 Northern Sumatra 3.260°N 98.331°E 0335 4.0 March 8, 2006 Northern Sumatra 3.999°N 96.255°E 0633 5.4 April 26, 2006 Northern Sumatra 3.812°N 96.008°E 2059 4.4 May 26, 2006 off the west coast of northern Sumatra 0608 4.6 °E July 22, Johor 2005 Bahru 1.4927° N, 103.7414 °E Nov 11, Kelang 2005 3.0449° N, 101.4456 °E Nov 12, Shah 2005 Alam 3.0733° N, 101.5185 °E Jan 1, Melaka 2006 2.1896° N, 102.2501 °E Jan 29, Kuala 2006 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Feb 2, Petaling 2006 Jaya 3.1279° N, 101.5945 °E March Kelang 7, 2006 3.0449° N, 101.4456 °E April Kuala 26, Lumpur 2006 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E May 26, Tg 2006 Bungah 5.4651° N, 135 1545 1-B 736 87 2250 1-A 822 106 2130 1-A 728 104 2100 1-A 661 114 1030 1-B 650 75 0906 1-A 369 93 2230 1-B 585 100 1130 1-B 637 97 2400 1-A 628 75 July 12, 2006 Aug 17, 2006 Jan 27, 2007 4.021°N 94.824°E Northern Sumatra 2.321°N 97.073°E Off West Coast Northern Sumatra 4.214°N 93.154°E Nias region 0.646°N 96.811°E 2320 4.7 July 12, 2006 0725 4.3 Aug 17, 2006 0846 3.7 Jan 27, 2007 Jan 27, 2007 Jan 27, 2007 Jan 27, 2007 Feb 18, 2007 Northern Sumatra 4.304°N 96.722°E 1745 4.0 Feb 18, 2007 March 3, 2007 off the west coast of northern Sumatra 2.684°N 94.158°E Nias Region 1.955°N 97.908°E 1009 4.3 March 4, 2007 1053 5.9 March 7, 2007 March 7, 2007 136 100.2822 °E 1430 1-B Trolak 3.8909° N, 101.3766 °E 0923 1-A Kelang 3.0449° N, 101.4456 °E Padang Terap 6.2560° N, 100.6647 °E Ipoh 4.5975° N, 101.0901 °E Kulim 5.3717° N, 100.5553 °E Ipoh 4.5975° N, 101.0901 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Nr Kulim 5.3717° N, 100.5553 °E Kulim 5.3717° N, 100.5553 509 70 932 98 2215 1-A 589 33 222 0 1-A 483 50 --- 1-A 502 38 --- 1-A 483 50 0930 1-B 566 103 0515 1-A 771 67 --- 1-A 478 38 4.2 °E May 23, Cheras --1-A 2007 3.1068° N, 101.7259 °E 1050 1-A April 8, Kuala 2007 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E 0245 1-B May 23, Cheras 2007 3.1068° N, 101.7259 °E May 22, 2007 Northern Sumatra 1.532°N 99.046°E 0506 April 8, 2007 Southern Sumatra 4.557°S 102.767°E 0448 4.9 May 23, 2007 off the west coast of northern Sumatra 2.668°N 94.121°E Off West Coast Northern Sumatra 2.524°N 92.862°E Nias Region 1.394°N 97.377°E 1956 4.2 1733 4.2 Oct 6, 2007 Kangar -6.4406° N, 100.1984 °E 0547 4.8 Oct 15, 2007 Nov 27, 2007 Nias Region 1.804°N 97.754°E 0504 4.7 Nov 28, 2007 Jan 10, 2008 Nias Region 1.890°N 97.934°E 1958 4.3 Jan 10, 2008 Jan 15, 2008 off the west coast of northern Sumatra 5.667°N 93.001°E Northern Sumatra 5.314°N 94.340°E 0943 4.7 1447 4.6 Oct 4, 2007 Oct 15, 2007 Jan 20, 2008 346 61 859 352 851 87 2-A 922 62 Kuantan 1445 1-A 3.7634° N, 103.2202 °E Ampang 1450 1-A 3.1491° N, 101.7625 °E 0824 1-B Kuala Lumpur 713 68 470 71 440 72 Jan 15, 2008 Pt Klang 2030 1-A 2.9999° N, 101.3928 °E 977 107 Jan 20, 2008 Ipoh --4.5975° N, 101.0901 °E 753 96 137 3.1390° N, 101.6869° E 1-A --Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Oct 1, 2008 Nias region 0.957°N 96.849°E 0312 4.9 Oct 1, 2008 June 29, 2008 Northern Sumatra 2.339°N 97.039°E 1955 4.8 July 14, 2008 Nias Region 1.443°N 96.347°E 2305 3.8 Feb 4, 2009 Simeulue 2.359°N 96.218°E 0903 4.9 Feb 10, 2009 Northern Sumatra 5.593°N 94.861°E 1850 4.7 March 11, 2009 Northern Sumatra 2.452°N 99.745°E 2111 4.0 April 9, 2009 Nicobar Islands 6.263°N 94.441°E 0810 5.1 June 29, Seremban 2.7259° 2008 N, 101.9378 °E July 14, Kuala 2008 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Feb 4, Puchong 2009 3.0327° N, 101.6188 °E Feb 9, Puchong 2009 3.0327° N, 101.6188 °E March Larkin 17, 1.4915° 2009 N, 103.7347 °E April 8, Larkin, 2009 Johor 1.4915° N, 103.7347 °E April 9, Kuala 2009 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E April Kuala 15, Lumpur 2009 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E April 16, 2009 Northern Sumatra 3.476°N 97.195°E 1333 4.6 138 1-A 592 66 0600 1-B 546 85 0320 1-B 625 72 1220 1-A 605 83 --- 1-B 802 111 --- 6-A 457 104 0600 1-B 116 0 117 1440 1-A 876 113 2240 1-B 499 94 May 25, 2009 Southern Sumatra 1.176°S 100.438°E 0157 4.4 June 4, 2009 Kepulauan Mentawai region 3.231°S 100.326°E 0142 4.5 Sept 25, Simeulue 2009 2.404°N 96.159°E 0506 4.0 Jan 26, 2010 Southern Sumatra 0.324°S 99.093°E 0653 5.0 Feb 9, 2010 Nias region 1.199°N 96.932°E 1858 4.5 March Southern 12,2010 Sumatra 0.847°S 99.943°E 1727 4.8 March 14, 2010 Northern Sumatra 0.929°N 99.467°E 0821 4.8 March 15, 2010 Northern Sumatra 4.444°N 96.556°E 1821 4.5 May 30, Kuala 2009 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E June 4, Kuala 2009 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Sept 25, Kuala 2009 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Jan 25, Ulu 2010 Tiram 1.5974° N, 103.8151 °E Feb 7, Danau 2010 Kota 3.2025° N, 101.7169 °E March Petaling 11,2010 Jaya 3.1279° N, 101.5945 °E March Kuala 14, Lumpur 2010 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E March Kelang, 16, Selangor 2010 3.0449° N, 101.4456 °E March Kuala 16, Lumpur 139 0530 5-A 620 82 1200 1-A 614 82 2153 1-A 620 82 --- 1-B 566 68 --- 2-B 577 67 0311 1-B 476 23 1111 1-A 347 45 1900 1-A 563 106 1200 1-A 586 104 2010 March 21, 2010 Northern Sumatra 2.108°N 98.930°E 1023 4.2 July 6, 2010 Northern Sumatra 2.311°N 99.103°E 1153 4.3 Northern Sumatra 2.311°N 99.103°E 1153 4.3 Sept 21, Southern 2010 Sumatra 0.618°S 99.039°E 0356 4.2 Oct 19, 2010 Northern Sumatra 4.653°N 96.311°E 1519 4.4 Nov 12, 2010 Simeulue 2.001°N 96.644°E 1618 4.4 Jan 26, 2011 Simeulue 2.205°N 96.829°E 1542 6.1 Feb 3, Off West 0539 4.7 July 6, 2010 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E March Kelang, 24, Selangor 2010 3.0449° N, 101.4456 °E July 4, Kuala 2010 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E July 4, Kelang 2010 3.0449° N, 101.4456 °E July 4, Kelang 2010 3.0449° N, 101.4456 °E Sept 22, Bukit 2010 Jalil, KL 3.0587° N, 101.6917 °E Oct 20, Ulu 2010 Tiram 1.5974° N, 103.8151 °E Nov 12, Penang 2010 5.3673° N, 100.2486 °E Jan 25, Petaling 2011 Jaya 3.1279° N, 101.5945 °E Seri Feb 1, 140 1900 3-A 298 70 --- 2-B 301 72 1430 2-B 272 73 1430 2-B 272 73 1500 1-A 326 69 1155 1-A 900 112 --- 1-B 687 3 1820 1-B 544 79 1420 2-B 663 94 2011 Feb 4, 2011 Coast Northern Sumatra 3.445°N 95.741°E Off West Coast Northern Sumatra 5.662°N 93.230°E Nias Region 0.961°N 97.279°E 2011 0908 4.3 2247 4.0 off the west coast of northern Sumatra 4.962°N 94.047°E Nias Region 1.942°N 96.549°E 1906 4.4 0622 4.9 Off West Coast Northern Sumatra 4.990°N 94.400°E Northern Sumatra 1.303°N 98.793°E 1202 5.3 1803 4.4 May 20, 2012 Simuelue 2.549°N 95.907°E 1611 4.8 June 10, 2012 Northern Sumatra 4.745°N 96.112°E 1512 4.7 April 14, 2011 Aug 6, 2011 Oct 15, 2011 Feb 22, 2012 March 24, 2012 Kembangan 3.0220° N, 101.7055 °E Feb 4, Sabak 2011 Bernam 3.7698° N, 100.9879 °E April Petaling 12, Jaya 2011 3.1279° N, 101.5945 °E Aug 7, Kuala 2011 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Oct 15, Kota 2011 Bharu 6.1248° N, 102.2544 °E Feb 22, Johor 2012 Bahru 1.4927° N, 103.7414 °E March Selangor 20, 3.0738° 2012 N, 101.5183 °E May 20, Ampang, 2012 Selangor 3.1491° N, 101.7625 °E June 11, Ayer 2012 Itam, Penang 5.4027° 141 2130 1-A 884 104 --- 2-B 540 64 1115 1-A 872 103 --- 1-A 784 54 --- 1-A 110 9 110 1130 4-B 379 58 1150 1-B 654 84 1215 1-A 466 81 July 15, 2012 Mentawai Region 1.171°S 99.884°E 0918 4.5 July 14, 2012 July 15, 2012 N, 100.2782 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Ampang 3.1491° N, 101.7625 °E 1300 1-B 516 23 1300 1-A 516 23 0706 1-B 582 8 --- 2-B 529 62 2145 Oct 27, 2012 Kepulauan Mentawai region 2.071°S 100.944°E 1500 4.7 Oct 26, 2012 Nov 9, 2012 Nias region 0.886°N 97.464°E 1959 5.2 Nov 7, 2012 Nov 11, 2012 Nicobar Islands 7.384°N 93.915°E 1542 4.1 Nov 12, 2012 1-A 989 118 Dec 31, 2012 Northern Sumatra 4.857°N 95.024°E 1906 4.5 771 106 Jan 30, 2013 southern Sumatra 0.685°S 99.497°E 0731 4.5 759 7 March 18, 2013 Sungaipenuh 2.261°S 100.806°E 1224 4.8 527 38 May 17, 35km W of Padangsidem 2127 4.2 1550 1-B 2.9264° N, 101.6964 °E 2300 2-A Feb 1, Alor 2013 Setar 6.1263° N, 100.3672 °E 1230 1-B March Larkin 17, 1.4915° 2013 N, 103.7347 °E 1710 1-A May 18, Kuala 2013 Lumpur 362 57 Dec 31, 2012 142 Putrajaya 2013 puan 1.359°N 98.946°E July 11, 2013 21km ENE of Sibolga 1,803 ° N 98,991 ° E 0716 4.9 July 10, 2013 July 11, 2013 21km ENE of Sibolga 1,803 ° N 98,991 ° E 0716 4.9 July 11, 2013 Aug 9, 2013 Reuleuet 4.971°N 96.013°E 1922 4.4 Aug 22, 2013 55km SSE of Banda Aceh 5.067°N 95.428°E 2359 4.5 Sept 22, 111km WSW 2013 of Banda Aceh 5.334°N 94.341°E 0606 4.7 Nov 3, 2013 Off the west coast of northern Sumatra 3.815°N 92.825°E 92km WNW of Sinabang 2.698°N 95.576°E 1611 4.2 2219 4.3 Off the west coast of northern Sumatra 1.869°N 93.626°E 13km S of 1421 4.4 1058 5.4 Dec 4, 2013 Dec 17, 2013 March 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E 2250 1-B Cheras 3.1068° N, 101.7259 °E 0425 1-B Off shore Kemaman 4.2316° N, 103.4254 °E Aug 10, Kelang 2013 3.0449° N, 101.4456 °E Aug 24, Puchong 2013 3.0327° N, 101.6188 °E Sept 21, Kuala 2013 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Nov 3, Kuala 2013 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Dec 5, Kuala 2013 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Dec 17, Kerteh 2013 4.5079° N, 103.4430 °E March 143 Pinang 213 51 467 54 --- 1-A 639 109 1130 2-A 722 108 --- 1-B 852 106 --- 1-B 988 94 1200 1-A 682 86 --- 1-B 113 2 74 --- 2-B 339 27 15, 2014 13, 2014 Pematangsian tar 2.838°N 99.072°E May 1, 2014 76km WSW of Onan Ganjang 1.962°N 97.967°E Sept 14, 176km SSE 2014 of Sinabang 1.146°N 97.256°E 1435 5.9 April 30, 2014 0452 5.3 Sept 16, 2014 May 7, 2015 140km SSE of Sinabang 1.382°N 97.012°E 1615 4.9 May 7, 2015 May 27, 2015 79km WNW of Sinabang 2.714°N 95.706°E 1631 4.1 May 30, 2015 June 24, 2015 246km SW of 2212 4.0 Banda Aceh 4.056°N 93.681°E June 25, 2015 Sept 21, 116km WSW 2015 of Banda Aceh 5.053°N 94.400°E 1758 4.9 Sept 24, 2015 Dec 15, 2015 107km WSW of Banda Aceh 5.280°N 94.389°E 0938 4.6 Dec 15, 2015 Feb 5, 2016 230km WNW 2031 4.5 of Sikabaluan 0.545°S 97.003°E Feb 5, 2016 Feb 17, 91km W of Feb 14, 1734 4.8 144 Tunggal 5.5830° N, 100.4959 °E Penang 5.3673° N, 100.2486 °E Penang 5.3673° N, 100.2486 °E Ipoh 4.5975° N, 101.0901 °E Parit Buntar 5.1474° N, 100.4212 °E Bangi 2.9198° N, 101.7809 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Kuala --- 2-B 453 34 --- 2-A 566 35 1130 1-B 534 53 1300 3-A 590 62 --- 1-A 909 98 --- 3-A 836 105 --- 1-A 835 106 0930 1-B 662 52 2300 3-B 835 107 2016 Banda Aceh 5.400°N 94.511°E 2016 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E 2330 2-B Feb 15, Kuala 2016 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E --May 26, Balik 1-B 2016 Pulau 5.3503° N, 100.2350 °E 1813 1-B June 23, Seri Kembangan 2016 3.0220° Off the west coast of northern Sumatra 2.754°N 93.182°E Binjai 3.560°N 97.894°E 0453 4.1 0612 4.2 Aug3, 2016 Sinabang 2.223°N 95.034°E 2310 4.4 Aug 2, 2016 Aug 13, 2016 Sinabang 1.425°N 97.031°E 0926 4.5 Aug 13, 2016 Jan 8, 2017 Sinabang 1.508°N 97.188°E 0709 4.3 Jan 9, 2017 Jan 16, 2017 Kabanjahe 3.300°N 98.386°E 1246 4.6 Jan 16, 2017 Jan 23, 2017 Sinabang 2.820°N 95.562°E 2048 4.6 Jan 21, 2017 May 27, 2016 June 24, 2016 145 N, 101.7055 °E Kuala Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Kajang 2.9935° N, 101.7874 °E Alor Setar 6.1263° N, 100.3672 °E Penang 5.4141° N, 100.3288 °E Bukit Bintang, KL 3.1468° N, 101.7113 835 107 838 70 425 98 --- 1-B 749 82 --- 1-A 556 72 --- 1-A 619 34 --- 1-A 309 42 --- 2-B 684 87 4.4 July 14, 2017 Padangsidem puan 1.412°N 99.150°E 1012 Nov 12, 2017 Sarimatondan g 2.813°N 98.959°E 1207 4.3 May 3, 2020 23 km NW of Banda Aceh 5.674°N 95.170°E 2230 4.6 0934 4.1 Sept 24, 5 km NNW 2020 of Bireun 5.246°N 96.684°E July 16, 2017 °E --2-A 2.9213° N, 101.6559 °E 2225 1-A Nov 12, Triang 2017 3.2476° N, 102.4161 °E 1357 1-B Cyberjaya May 3, 2.9213° 2020 N, 101.6559 °E 1408 1-A Sept 24, Kuala 2020 Lumpur 3.1390° N, 101.6869 °E Cyberjaya 323 58 386 83 779 113 600 113 The occurrence of earthquakes in the Sumatra region according to time (UTC) is given in Figure 40 below. Figure 40: Time Distribution of Earthquakes in Sumatra, Indonesia. 16 14 No. of Earthquake 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 TIME Based on the small sample of events, it is interesting to note that earthquakes in Sumatra tend to peak at 0600 hours with another peak about 12 hours later at 146 1900 hours UTC. If earthquakes were attributed to an extra-solar coordinate and brought about by the excitation from gravitational waves, then these two peaks are what is expected to happen. According to Weber (1968) on the response of the Earth to gravitational waves, from a specific direction of the sky, all points on Earth which lie on a plane perpendicular to this direction will be excited, or a specific point or location on Earth will feel maximum vibration twice a day as it crossed the plane. This will occur twice in a sidereal day. For the earthquakes in the Sumatra region, it happened twice a day, i.e. at around 2 pm local time and another excitation at 3 am. Now let us take a look at the time of UFO appearances in Malaysia for the same time period. Table 41: Time Distribution of UFO Sightings in Peninsular Malaysia. 25 No of Report 20 15 10 5 0 Time From the table above, we can see that the number of UFO sightings in Malaysia started to accelerate at about 1100 UTC, peaked at 1200 and 1400 hours before declining in numbers. There was another minor peak around 2100-2200 hours. The difference in time between the two peaks is about 10-11 hours. Comparing the peak hours of the Sumatran earthquakes, which stands at 0600 UTC and 1900 UTC, UFO appearances in Malaysia however peaked at around 1200 UTC and lag by about 5 hours after the quake. This raised the question – could there possibly be two types of energy involved? 147 While earthquakes could be triggered by gravitational waves, UFOs on the other hand could be utilizing electromagnetic waves. The interesting connection is that the two forms of energy could be coming from the same extra-solar coordinate! Figure 42 below shows the distribution of UFO sightings according to days before and after an earthquake. To get a general picture, all UFO sightings made on the same day as the earthquake was counted as 1 day. Only UFO sightings made one week before and after the earthquake were used. Figure 42: The number of UFO sightings recorded according to days before or after an Earthquake. 100 90 No of UFO Report 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Q 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Day Before & After Quake Figure 42 charts the number of UFO sightings observed in Malaysia within a period of one week before and after an earth tremor in Sumatra, Indonesia. “Q” in the middle of the chart represent the day of the earthquake, with the days for UFO appearances before the quake on the left and after the quake on the right. As can be seen, most of the UFO sightings were made one day before or after the earthquake. In many of the cases, the UFO appears within hours of the tremors.This confirms the earlier observation in Figure 41 that UFOs appear in Malaysia about 5 hours after the tremor. And the second peak occurs about 9 hours later. This would place UFO events in general either one day before or after the quake. 148 These findings show the close relationship between the seismic events in Sumatra and the UFO appearances in Peninsular Malaysia. This is a significant piece of evidence showing that both events are related. The number of UFO appearances according to earthquake magnitudes is given in table 11 below, taking into account only UFOs sighted within three days before or after the quake. Table 11: Correlation Between Earthquake Magnitudes and the Number of UFO sightings reported in Peninsular Malaysia. Earthquake Magnitude Above 6.1 5.0 to 6.0 4.5 to 4.9 4.0 t0 4.4 Below 3.9 Number of UFO sightings 1 37 84 84 10 From the table above, it is suggestive that earth tremors with magnitude of 4.0 to 4.9 appear to favour or are ideal for the manifestation of UFOs. While the magnitude of earth tremors are measured based on the energy released from the ground, if we take a look the other way around, based on the assumption that earthquakes are triggered from an extraterrestrial source, then the amount of energy released from Source X is in the range of 4.0 to 4.9 as seen on the Richter scale. If the energy released from Source X is too great, say magnitude 7.9 and above, UFOs operational capabilities most probably became unsuitable, just like airplanes flying in severe turbulence weather conditions. From the observations of UFO appearances in Malaysia, when large earthquakes strike Sumatra in the intensity range of 7.9 or greater, there are usually no UFO reports made in Malaysia. There have been many mega-quakes recorded in Sumatra over the decades, but none accompanied by any UFO sightings in Malaysia. Coinciding with these large quakes, tremors were usually felt in parts of Peninsular Malaysia. Somehow UFOs do not make an appearance during these violent tremors, even though the tremors were felt locally. 149 Figure 43 below gives the number of UFO sightings in Malaysia based on the intensity of the earthquakes in Sumatra. Figure 43: Distribution of UFO Sighting Reports According to Earthquake Magnitude. 30 No of UFO Report 25 20 15 10 5 0 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6 6.1 Magnitude of Earthquake Since most of the earthquakes registered in Sumatra are in the range of 4.0 to 5.0, it is natural that we see a spike in the number of UFO sighting reports in Malaysia that were also made during the same intensity level of seismic events in Sumatra. Large earthquakes, however, contributed very few UFO sighting reports in Malaysia. Most of the UFO sightings in Malaysia coincided with earthquake magnitudes in the range of 4.2 to 4.7. The number of UFO sightings in Malaysia however decreases with the increase of earthquake intensities. This indicates that large magnitude earthquakes are not favourable for UFO appearance. It was initially suspected that the intensity of the earth tremors in Sumatra would determine how far away from the earthquake epicentre the UFOs were able to appear. Figure 44 below, shows the average distances in kilometers measured from the quake epicenter to the location of the UFO appearances in Malaysia. 150 Figure 44: Correlation Between Earthquake Intensity and Distance of UFO Appearance. 1200 Mean Distance 1000 800 600 400 200 0 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6 6.1 Earthquake Magnitude The table above indicates that the majority of the UFOs that appeared in Malaysia are in the range of 400 to below 800 kilometers from the earthquake epicentres. There is a slight increase in the operating radius extending up to 900 kilometers for earthquake with magnitudes above 5.0. Based on the evidence and observations of earthquakes and UFO events in this region, it is indicative that UFO sightings in Peninsular Malaysia are directly related to the seismic events in Sumatra, Indonesia. Most of the UFOs appear in Malaysia just hours before or after the quake. These are clear indications that UFOs and earthquakes are somehow related. What we need to do next is to identify the possible common denominator. *** 151 Chapter 12 Source X: Its Nature and Possible Stimulus of UFOs and Earthquakes. There are geomagnetic and geophysical events that manifest on Earth and on the Sun that are not yet fully understood. However, many theories abound to explain them. Some could be valid while others may not. But apart from that, uncertainties still remain about events such as earthquakes, geomagnetic polar wanderings, and geomagnetic ‘jerks’ etc, that seem to beg for an alternative answer. The presence of Source X, a mysterious and hypothetical body in the Solar System, could explain most of the observed geomagnetic and gravitational events and would satisfy the condition for the concept of Occam’s Razor. Occam’s Razor stipulates that the simplest explanation is usually the right one. Each observed event on Earth (earthquakes, magnetic polar wanderings etc) and the Sun (sunspots, magnetic pole reversals etc) based on current thinking seem to operate according to their own dynamics. But with the presence of Source X acting as a common denominator, this could provide a holistic solution that encompasses all of the observed events. It has been shown in the previous chapters that: 1. UFOs and earthquakes are related. The occurrence of either one will usually be followed by the next (Chapter 11). 2. Major UFO wave cycles around the Earth actually represent the orbital period of an unknown body around the Sun, i.e. Source X (Chapter 6). 3. Large earthquakes and major UFO waves are synchronised about every 20-22 years to follow each other in their latitudinal distribution (Chapter 10). For this to occur, both events must share a common cause. 4. Since the Sun’s magnetic pole reversals are also synchronised every 22 years, the evidence is even stronger to support the existence of a ‘Source X’. The above observations are a clear indication of the presence of an unidentified body, Source X. Its existence could be responsible in triggering earthquakes, 152 inducing solar events and contributing to the existence of the UFO phenomenon. The correlation of observations and events showed that was the case. So which celestial object in the Solar System could not only induce earthquakes and sunspots, but also contribute to the UFO phenomenon? The single most prominent object in our Solar System is the Sun itself. Being the most massive object in our Solar System, its gravitational pull exerts pressure on all of the smaller planets making them orbit around the Sun. The gravitational effect from the Sun however do not cause earthquakes. We can exclude the Sun or even Jupiter as the primary culprit for triggering earthquakes. On the other hand, however, the Sun also experiences some form of electromagnetic disturbance on its surface, which manifests in the form of sunspots. Such activity could be generated or induced by a hypothetical, magnetised astrophysical body. But there is no such celestial bodies in the Solar System. A 2013 paper published in Geophysical Review Letters, analyzed 100 years of sunspot and geomagnetic data, found no evidence of a connection between the Sun and earthquakes. Over the course of the Sun's 11-year variable cycle, the occurrence of solar flares and magnetic storms waxes and wanes, but earthquakes appear to occur continuously, with no obvious pattern associated with what occurs on the Sun. However, the Marilia Tavares & Anibal Azevedo (2011) analysis of the solar cycle seems to show the number of global earthquakes recorded during solar maxima and minima, varies in accordance with high and low sunspot cycles. The influence of the number of seismic events was however seen to be limited to certain geographical regions only. In another study, statistical analysis carried out by Vito Marchitelli et al (July 2020), also found a clear correlation between worldwide earthquakes and solar events. With regards to these findings, the appearances of sunspots should raise some concern. While the existing theory attributes sunspots to a process within the Sun, there is also the possibility that sunspots are triggered by an external source. If the cause of earthquakes is extraterrestrial in nature, the only likely source is coming from an extraterrestrial object, which has the ability to induce some form of geological effect on the Earth and the Sun. This energy force could come in the form of gravitational and electromagnetic waves. 153 Electromagnetic waves are created as a result of vibrations between an electric field and a magnetic field. In other words, electromagnetic waves are composed of oscillating magnetic and electric fields. They are deflected neither by an electric field, nor a magnetic field. However, the opposite effect seems to take place near the magnetic North Pole where we see the deflection of UFO waves away from the North Pole as it swings into the European theater (refer to Chapter 7). This indicates that the energy beam from Source X is magnetic and that is why it was being deflected away from the north magnetic pole! This also shows that its magnetic force is of the same polarity to the Earth’s north magnetic pole, hence the deflection. This effect, however, is not observed in the South Pole. The southwards migration of the UFO wave track (or orbit of Source X) from the Eastern Hemisphere neatly joins up with the tip of South America and into the Western Hemisphere. Occasionally it passes close to the tip of South Africa before passing over into Brazil. In the search for an answer to the possible nature of the cause of UFO waves and what triggers earthquakes, we need to look at the existing models of astrophysical objects already known about and confirmed to exist. One such object high on the list are Black Holes. Other exotic celestial objects such as Pulsars, Quasars, Red Dwarfs etc. lack the ability to curve space and do not have the right magnetic intensity. While Black Holes have massive gravity, Source X appears to have an opposite makeup and is primarily magnetic in nature. Source X seems to behave like a strong magnetic source in the sky. Its effect however comes in the form of magnetic pulses. These pulses are in the form of an energy beam, which theoretically could act as the medium (or corridor) for UFOs to appear on Earth. The existence of such strong magnetic pulses, including gravitational waves, could trigger earthquakes and sunspots. Sunspots are also magnetic in nature and it would need a source of strong magnetic energy to affect the surface of the Sun. The fact that sunspot cycle fluctuates between 9-14 years with its up and down in the number of sunspots count, this observed period seem to be in line or coincide with the major UFO wave cycle which also occurred between 9 to 14 years. In trying to assess the origin of UFOs, the sky appears to offer us as the most plausible source. 154 As we know, all the planets in this Solar System are non-habitable and other Earth-like planets in other star systems are too far away. The only promising prospect was only if there is some kind of a short cut in Space. The existence of a magnetic mass of energy or an astrophysical “door” in the sky would make long distant space ventures possible. At present, this is only practical in science fiction scenarios. John Keel regularly spoke about a space-time “window” or window areas in his writings. This was derived from his observations that UFOs and its occupants had the habit of appearing at the same location year after year. Other authors talks about a “gate” in the heavens. The premise was when the gate opened, UFOs filtered through in droves and by that, UFO waves occurred. Likewise, when the gate closes, no UFO sightings were made. Science fiction writers fantasized about “star-gates”. All of these concepts point to the same thing – the existence of a door in the space-time fabric. Its existence in reality is unknown. For the space-time continuum or fabric to be punctured, only a massive imploding object of greater than ten solar masses can achieve that. Its massive gravity, during the violent cosmologic process, was being compacted or compressed to only several kilometers in diameter. This is how Black Holes were formed. While Black Holes trapped even light from escaping its massive gravity, thus giving its name Black Holes, nothing was supposed to emerge from it, either particles or electromagnetic radiation. However recent studies showed that Black Holes do emit light and had been photographed! So the understanding of the nature of Black Holes and its name needed to be changed! The one fact that remained unchanged was that its massive gravity sucked up any matter that came close to it. If Black Holes do release any form of energy, it would have no effect on Earth due to its far-away distance. To aid in the operational and flight capabilities of UFOs, this type of compact astrophysical mass presumably could provide the opportunity when it released the trapped energy in the form of pulses. These pulses would create a magnetic corridor in space. UFOs presumably ride in these electromagnetic pulses when it is pointed towards Earth. But when the pulsating source rotates in other directions, the number of UFO appearances on Earth during that period, would decline. Do Black Holes have the ability to act as doors in the sky? The name sounds interesting, but the nature and physical properties of a Black Hole do not offer 155 the prospect of interstellar excursions. This is due to the fact that it attracts and utterly destroys matter. Anything that got sucked into it would either end up reduced to atoms, or would have the near-impossible task of escaping from its massive gravitational pull. A Black Hole, if it pulsed with gravitational radiation, is too weak to aid or support interstellar flight. What is needed are electromagnetic waves. These waves are similar to laying the track needed to operate an electromagnetically propelled spacecraft like UFO in an electromagnetic environment. If trains need tracks to move, so do UFOs that require an electromagnetic ground track to operate. The observations of UFOs operating along orthotenic straight lines indicate that this hypothesis may be correct. What type of naturally occurring extraterrestrial object can provide this type of electromagnetic ground track? There are none at the moment. While railway lines are fixed, orthotenic lines move in time and space. With this ever-changing scenario, UFO appearances on Earth appear to follow the orthotenic lines. UFOs can only appear where orthotenic lines are present. For this reason, UFO appearances on Earth are limited. This observation also means that the source rotates. The behaviour and properties of this extraterrestrial source dictates where and when a UFO appears, and for how long. For this reason we see that UFOs are unable to manifest at will. The observed behaviour of UFOs seems to support the existence of a Source X as we see that UFOs are distributed in this fashion: 1. UFOs are dispersed or appear on Earth daily in a random fashion. This suggests that UFOs come in pulses, or ride on magnetic pulses. Short pulses meant a short stay. 2. Occasionally they come in waves, flaps, flurries or spates of sightings. This happens when the pulses are in rapid succession. 3. Either daily or occasional clusters of reports: UFOs cannot operate beyond a certain period of time and they cannot operate outside the predetermined straight line created by Source X during a 24-hour period. 4. Numerous reports around the world describe seeing a UFO waiting stationary in the sky for several minutes, before ascending at an angle, at astonishing speed into the sky. They appeared to be waiting for the right time to jump back into the ever-changing electromagnetic beam. Imagine it like someone being lost in the dark at sea and having to depend on a rotating beam of light from a lighthouse to set a course for home. 156 These are the observed short comings of UFOs, or their controlling factors, that we see in all UFO reports from around the globe. The existence of a Source X behaving as a regulator could explain these observations; such as the short duration of a manifestation, the sudden changes in the direction of travel as the UFO waits for the ideal moment to travel, how the UFO waves occur, plus very few landings. One might ask – why is it that there is no UFO invasion of Earth, if indeed UFOs are alien visitors? The answer lies with the space-time limitation that does not allow UFOs to operate freely on Earth. However, if this regulator or Source X broke down (or failed) in the distant future, as all celestial objects finally do, then we can expect to see large scale appearances of UFOs. If this inter-galactic, or inter-dimensional short cut does exist, then there is no problem concerning distant, interplanetary visitors being able to reach Earth in a short span of time and on a regular basis. The fact that abundant UFO sightings are made across the world each year, shows that our present notion that rapid interstellar travel is impossible, is not valid. The UFO phenomenon shows that there is a way to overcome the short-comings of long-distance interplanetary travel. If in the past, the trade winds helped sailing ships to travel across the oceans, a natural force in space could help spaceships travel faster to their planetary destinations. Since electromagnetic energy is a natural force, just like the trade winds, it controls the where and when of interstellar travel. UFO appearances on Earth were dictated by the same principle. UFOs cannot appear where and when they choose. Source X regulates and/or determines the situation. As a result of which we see many different types of UFO entities arriving in the same area during a UFO wave. In other words, they are all found in the same spot! UFO waves also occur in conjunction with the orbital position of Source X with respect to the wave area. Even earthquakes and the occasional meteorite fall, including UFO manifestations, are channeled into the same area! (see Chapter 9). While some researchers believe that UFOs are from a parallel dimension, the messages and sign language used by UFO occupants while communicating with witnesses worldwide, indicates that they come from the stars (Jamaludin 2011). The numerous observations of UFOs seen ascending or descending from the sky, make it more plausible that the phenomenon originates from above. 157 On the other hand, for earthquakes, we have no knowledge about whether an object such as a Black Hole can cause earthquakes. Since Black Holes are found light-years away from Earth, they have practically no effect on us. But what if there was something else of a similar nature very close to the Earth, would we be affected in some way? If the source was emitting a massive combination of gravity-electromagnetism, and it was coming in the form of pulses, Earth would definitely be affected. We should be able to see some signs of this as an indication of its existence. Are UFOs, earthquakes, moonquakes, marsquakes, sunspots, magnetic pole reversals of the Sun and the Earth, the perturbation of asteroids and meteors out of their orbits, all indicators that something exists nearby that we are unaware of? Any effects on Earth from a compact astrophysical object could come from its gravity field, if it was massive enough, or from gravitational and electromagnetic waves that it could emit. Other forms of emission would be in the X-ray spectrum. How these energies were emitted would decide the effect on Earth. If the energy came in waves, just like solar flares or magnetic storms, it would engulf the whole Earth. But looking at the nature of earthquakes and UFO appearances, which can be both random and sometimes localized, the indication is that the source of energy must be coming to Earth in a very compact, directional and localized manner. In other words, it is like a laser pointer being directed specifically at a particular area. This idea seems to harmonise with the observation about how UFO sightings and earthquake epicentres are distributed. To actually align the distribution pattern of UFO sightings along orthotenic lines, with its ever-changing magnetic bearing, the compact, directional energy beam must come from a source that is both rotating on its axis and at the same time unstable. This means that the source sometimes spins or rotates slowly and at other times moves rapidly. Why this happens is directly related to the amount of energy it releases, possibly at its pole (s). More energy released provides the momentum for it to rotate faster. It slows down when the energy being released is weak. Looking at this scenario, a rapidly rotating source, if it is responsible for UFO appearances and earthquakes, could cause a UFO wave and numerous aftershocks following a large quake. When its energy dissipates, the UFO waves ends abruptly. 158 The same should occur with earthquakes. This slow or fast spinning mode will affect how the energy beam (imagine it like a laser beam) is directed towards Earth. In the slow spinning mode, only one beam will cut across the face of the Earth in a 24-hour period. We should see only one or two orthotenic lines in a day. If this beam is aiding UFO appearances on Earth, then we can expect to see UFO sighting reports anywhere along the straight line made by the beam arcing over the area. We see that this beam would move on Great Circle lines. In the slow rotation mode, only a few UFOs can be expected to appear. However, on the fast or rapid spinning mode, the source being more stable on its axis, it will direct its beam to a localised area. In this case, UFO sightings would be concentrated on a small area and we could either experience a major UFO wave or smaller clusters of UFO sightings. Using the same model, we see that it could also explain how earthquakes are distributed in time and space. Most of the time, earth tremors are of low magnitude. In the rapidly spinning mode, the energy beam is directed to a small, localized area (inducing more geological stress) and we can expect a major quake and its accompanying aftershocks. In this context, the magnitude of an earthquake is not determined by the amount of energy released from the ground, but by the stress induced as the result of the passing gravitational-electromagnetic beam crossing a particular fault line several times. The magnitude of the earthquake is therefore proportional to the number of energy wave beam that pass over the epicentre. A large earthquake should occur when several energy beams cross and intersect the fault line at one common foci. When drawn on a map, the intersecting lines take the form of a wheels spokes (similar in nature to what is seen during a peak UFO wave). If the trigger mechanism for earthquakes comes from the ground, we should by now, with the aid of modern technology, be able to predict earthquakes. Yet earthquake prediction still remains elusive. Maybe we are looking in the wrong direction. In earthquakes, we saw the secondary effects of plate movements but failed to look at the primary cause, which may actually have resulted in the sudden jolt of plate collisions. While plate tectonics and continental drift form the basic framework of earthquake mechanics, an external force is needed to get them in motion. Continental drift is too slow to cause or generate violent quakes. 159 The synchronicity seen for large earthquakes and major UFO waves in 21-22 year cycles shows that large earthquakes do not happen due to interlocking plates giving way, but are triggered by a spontaneous external force. Since large earthquakes of magnitude 8.0 only occur about once a year and major UFO waves also follow the same trend, further supports the possible existence of Source X as its primary stimulus. Back to the subject of UFOs, it is not possible for any alien life forms to reach Earth easily in a short span of time, due to the vast distances between galaxies unless if there are short cuts or super highways for interstellar travel. The existence of Black Holes and Wormholes could provide such instant travel, but this is just a theory. We know that Black Holes do exist but its counterpart, the Wormhole, is still on the drawing board. Source X, represents another class of astrophysical object and is another possibility. But its true nature, if it exists, is still unknown. However the presence of the UFO phenomenon indicates there could really be one. This hypothetical source of celestial energy is certainly not a solid astronomical body, but most probably a mass of compacted energy. In that form, it releases the energy that causes tectonic plates to move, collide and result in earthquakes. To use an analogy, if you pushed a motionless car, it then hit a wall and the wall collapsed. From our point of view the car causes the wall to break. But in reality, the culprit was who or what pushed the car. The same or a similar scenario appears to create earth tremors. The plates move and collide, or move over or under the other plates and the earth trembles. We see the effects, but fail to see the triggering force behind them, just as we fail to see who pushed the car. Each time an earthquake strikes, we attribute it to the movement of the plates. In reality the plates were moving very slowly. So what could be the primary cause that makes the plate to jerk violently forward, jolting it from its snail’s pace? Interlocking plates take too long to break or slide, so there must be an alternative explanation and Source X is the most probable candidate. Where is Source X? Major UFO waves occur in a 10-year cycle. If this cycle represented the orbital period of a celestial body, Source X, then its position would be somewhere between Mars and Jupiter and as we know no planet exists between them. 160 The Bodes-Titius Law of Planetary Arrangement has placed all the planets in our Solar System in their respective (almost correct) positions for the five planets nearest to the Sun (see Figure 45 below). Only Saturn, Uranus and Neptune are displaced. According to the Bodes-Titius Law, extending outward from the Sun, each planet should be approximately twice as far from the Sun as the one before. During the formation of the Solar System, at first there was some order with the law pertaining to planetary distances from the Sun being placed in predetermined positions. Something must have happened later on, with a possible interruption at 2.8 A.U. (astronomical units) from the Sun, causing the displacement of Saturn and Uranus and Neptune away from the Sun. Jupiter, however, was not affected as it was a gas giant. If there were any other planets after Neptune in this Solar System, they would be displaced or pushed further out from the Sun by about 9 to 20 AU. (the search for the 9th planet is still ongoing). Figure 45: Actual Planetary Distances from the Sun in Astronomical Unit (AU) Table 12: The Titius-Bode Law on the Planetary Distance from the Sun Planet Mercury Venus Earth Mars Asteroid Belt Jupiter Saturn Uranus Neptune Distance (A.U) 0.39 0.72 1.00 1.52 -5.20 9.54 19.18 30.06 Orbital Period (Year) 0.24 0.62 1.00 1.88 -11.86 29.46 84.01 164.79 161 Titius-Bodes Law (A.U) 0.3 0.7 1.0 1.6 2.8 5.2 10.0 19.6 38.8 Comparing the actual distances of the eight planets in the Solar System, the Titius-Bodes Law holds true until Jupiter. However, for the planets after Jupiter, there is a displacement of 0.46 AU for Saturn, 0.42 AU for Uranus and 8.74 AU for Neptune respectively. This indicates that some violent upheaval must have taken place close to Jupiter when the Solar System was being formed. The only abnormal feature in the Solar System that is still observable today is the existence of the Asteroid Belt. The unexplained presence of millions of chunks of rock, some are iron and others stone, is a good indication that a planet might have existed at 2.8 AU from the Sun in the early formation of the Solar System. The theory that the asteroids are fragments of an exploded planet was first put forward by the astronomer, Heinrich Olbers, more than 150 years ago and is now widely accepted. Probably due to some stability factors involving its unbalanced composition of iron and stones, its gravity and magnetism and massive weight etc, initially caused the planet to explode, but then an opposite reaction occurred and it imploded. For that possible reason, we see numerous chunks of rock still trapped in an orbit around the Sun. But possibly hidden from the eye and still remaining around 2.8 AU from the Sun, is a by-product of the implosion process. What remains could be a compact mass of energy. This is Source X. This compact mass of energy must be emitting energy in the form of gravitational and electromagnetic waves. The gravitational component possibly triggers earthquakes, while the electromagnetic component allows UFOs to use its beamed waves as a flight corridor leading to the Earth. Could such an object exist all this time without anyone ever noticing its presence? This seems to be the case. Our focus over the years has only been on the planets and their moons. If Source X, or the remnants of the planet between Mars and Jupiter exists, while not visible to the eye, its effects are there for all to see. The most notable geophysical effects could be: 1. 2. 3. 4. Earthquakes, marsquakes, moonquakes Sunspots on the Sun Magnetic field reversal on Earth and the Sun Geomagnetic jerks on Earth 162 5. Perturbation of asteroids out of their orbits. In an earlier chapter we saw that earthquakes, UFOs and meteors seem to choose the same spot in space and time. The existence of Source X can satisfactorily explain all these observations. Our only problem is Source X, is it really out there? To determine the possible existence of Source X, we need to take a fresh look at the asteroid belt. According to the theories, one postulates that the mass in the belt was not large enough to form a planet when the Solar System was being created. The other theory suggests that there had been a planet, but it had shattered, possibly due to the strong gravitational influence from nearby Jupiter. Or there could be another possible reason: what if planet X is a gravitationally and magnetically unstable planet, mainly composed of magnetized irons? It cannot balance its mass due to its strong gravitational and magnetic nature. It would eventually either spontaneously explode or implode. If it had exploded, we should see chunks of rock as is evident in the asteroid belt. If it had imploded, we would see nothing except the chunks of rocks leftover after the initial explosion. But there should be other noticeable effects as well. Planets like Saturn, Neptune and Uranus would be prevented from adhering to the Titius-Bodes Law. If there is a 9th planet, it would be pushed out further into the darkness. Considering the large amount of rocks in the asteroid belt, the latter theory appears more plausible. This is further supported by the numerous pock marks found on Mars, the Moon and also on Earth which suggests there had been a major explosion in the Solar System. That explosion could possibly have originated from the planet that should have existed between Mars and Jupiter. Ovenden (1972) working on the principle of ‘Least Interaction Action’ in his analysis of satellite orbits, showed that the principle correctly predicts the major semi-axes of the five Uranus satellites and the five inner satellites of Jupiter based on the precision of the known masses (also taking into account its orbital eccentricities). When applied to the Solar System, the principle of Least Interaction Action is seen to be capable of representing all of the major semi-axes of the planets Mercury to Neptune with an accuracy in the order of 1 %. 163 The important catch is that it assumes that a body 90 times the mass of Earth existed in the asteroid belt at the beginning of the solar system around 16 million years ago, then it suddenly disintegrated. This finding is a very significant piece of evidence and supports the theory that a planet once existed between Mars and Jupiter. However, it cannot explain why the planet disintegrated. But looking at the observation that UFO wave tracks are being deflected when over the northern latitudes, the weakening and wandering of the Earth’s magnetic north pole, the reversal of the Sun’s magnetic poles, the formation of sunspots and the synchronicity of large earthquakes and major UFO waves, these are concrete indications that we are dealing with a large and highly magnetised body present in the Solar System. Like Black Holes, which implode due to their colossal mass and gravity, the same happens when a planet has enormous mass and magnetism. This is what happened to the planet between Mars and Jupiter. What remains can be called Source X, a highly magnetised body which not only contributes to the magnetic effects on Earth and the Sun, but also contributes to the UFO phenomenon, which incidentally is also of an electromagnetic nature. It is obvious that earthquakes and UFOs are two different types of event. But as they seem to share several close relationships, that could indicate that both were caused or triggered by one common factor. This suggests that the stimulus originates from a source that dominates both magnetically and gravitationally. If this unidentified source is located within our Solar System, the culprit could be, and most probably will, be located in the Asteroid Belt, as there is a vacant space for Planet X. The existence of the asteroid belt provides confirmation that a major explosion took place there. Since it was observed that UFO waves move around the Earth in a mean 10 year cycle and for some reason sunspots occur in an 11 year cycle, it becomes clear that there is a common, undetected single source in this Solar System with an eccentric orbit that fluctuates between 9-14 years in its journey around the Sun. If the 10 year cycle seen in UFO waves and the 11 year cycle observed for sunspots represent the orbit of the stimulus for both events, then it would place the contributing source at a location between Mars and Jupiter. 164 Observations supporting the existence of Source X are summed up below: 1- No planet exists between Mars and Jupiter, but according to the TitiusBodes Law there should be one. What happened to this planet, could it have transformed into an astrophysical body? 2- Asteroids are occasionally moved out of their orbits, so something must be responsible. 3- The Earth undergoes a magnetic pole reversal every several thousand years. If it is not solely an internal process, then something from outside with a powerful magnetic nature could produce the effect. 4- The Earth’s north magnetic pole wanders in time and shifts its location westwards from Canada to Siberia. An external magnetic source could be responsible. 5- The Sun changes its polarity every 11 years. If it is not an internal process, something external with a powerful magnetic nature, could trigger this effect. 6- The sunspot cycle with its ups and downs in the sunspot count occurs every 11 years. 7- Modern technology cannot predict earthquakes. Do we have the theory wrong or are we looking in the wrong direction? The relationship between UFOs and earthquakes points to the need for a new theory. 8- The controversial subject of the UFO phenomenon cannot be resolved. There is something missing in our understanding of the universe. The existence of Source X could offer both an insight and a solution. Notable Effect in the Solar System Due to the presence of a Compact Magnetic Source. If Source X is magnetic in nature and its orbit is highly inclined to the ecliptic plane, but all other planets orbit around the Sun (see Figure 46 below), some notable effect on the Earth’s and the Sun’s magnetism should be discernable. 165 Figure 46: Source X Inclination to the Ecliptic Plane Over the years, the Earth’s magnetic pole has been observed to be wandering. In recent years it has shifted away from Canada towards Siberia. These changes appear to be associated with the localized weakening of the Earth’s magnetic field. While this has been attributed to an internal process, the more plausible cause could be an induction process coming from an outside magnetic source. This possibility, however, has never been highlighted by the scientific community, as most effects from large celestial objects are associated with gravity. If such a magnetic source exists, over the course of thousands of years, where the source circumscribes or orbits around the Sun and Earth, passing over the Earth’s north and south magnetic poles, it would naturally induce the polarity on Earth and the Sun to change. This has happened on Earth and on the Sun. This is similar to the effect of a bar magnet moving around another bar magnet. The moving magnet retains its strength and momentum, while the stationary magnet absorbs all the effects. In our case, the Earth is the stationary magnet. This induction process does not make the Earth’s magnetic field stronger, but weaker. In the last 200 years, the electromagnetic field around the Earth has lost about 9% of its strength. Between 1970 and 2020, the Earth’s magnetic field has weakened considerably in a region stretching from Africa to South America, this is known as the 'South Atlantic Anomaly'. The Earth's magnetic field flips every few hundred thousand years or so on average, which means the magnetic north becomes magnetic south and vice 166 versa, but the Earth does not actually turn upside down. This, however, would change, as in the long term the effect will weaken the Earth’s magnetism and the poles will flip with the Earth, literally placing the Earth in an upside down position. In this orientation, the South Pole or the Antarctica Region will face the North Star and the North Pole and the Arctic Region takes a new position as the South Pole. When this happens, it would make the Sun appear to rise in the west each morning! This is what is described in Islamic teaching: that before the end of the world and the entire universe, the Sun would appear in the west. The Sun's magnetic field changes polarity approximately every 11 years during the peak of each solar cycle. This however does not happen on Earth. Instead the process takes thousands of years to flip the poles. But the fact remains that the existence of an outside magnetic stimulus could cause the observed changes in the magnetic fields of both the Earth and the Sun. It is their geophysical composition that determines their rate of change. Source X acting as the Door in the Sky. The planets that formed in our Solar System are of various types. All planets are harmless as they rotate around their parent star. It was only when a planet transformed itself, either due to its great mass, intense gravity or as the result of the influence of another massive body, it would finally explode or implode depending on the situation. Imploding stars with enough mass could form Black Holes. Dying stars could turn into Red or White Dwarfs. Some become compacted and become Neutron Stars or Pulsars. In theory, only a massive body with massive gravity has the ability to curve space and time. Black Holes can theoretically puncture the fabric of space-time, but could be an unfriendly hole or door in the sky. Its massive gravity utterly destroys all objects and does not permit anything to get out, even light, which is why they are called Black Holes. Any spaceship unlucky enough to get trapped in it, even if it was not utterly destroyed, would not be able to free itself. A new theory has emerged that refers to a class of exotic objects known as ‘Generic Objects of Dark Energy’ (GEODEs). These objects appear to be similar to Black Holes, but they consist of a core of dark energy, surrounded by a spinning layer. 167 The description of these GEODEs seem very close to the nature of ‘Source X’ as it affects our reality with dark energy and dark matter and presto, we see UFOs appearing in large numbers out of it, that seem to not only defy our laws of gravity, but also our understanding of its existence. A more friendly version would be a Wormhole. Is Source X a Wormhole? At the moment there is no evidence to support their existence. The evidence we have at hand seems to support the fact that Source X has the following properties: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. It is a magnetic body. It rotates on its axis. Its orbit is inclined at 23.5 degrees to the ecliptic plane. It occupies the space between Mars and Jupiter. It revolves around the Sun like any other body in the Solar System, but in a highly elliptical and eccentric orbit. 6. Its eccentric orbit takes between 9 and 14 years to travel around the Sun. 7. It releases electromagnetic and gravitational energy in the form of pulses. 8. Its pulses are compact and directional in nature, like a laser pointer. 9. These pulses come in several modes – either slow or fast, which indicates that it is a spinning body. 10. Source X cannot be a solid object, but a compact mass of energy, literally like a hole in space. The above hypothetical properties seem to correlate well with the observed events on Earth and the Sun: 1. The Earth is tilted at 23.5 degrees with the same inclination of 23.5 degrees orbital orientation of Source X around the Sun. 2. The projected major UFO wave ground tracks correspond to the orbital route taken by Source X around the Sun. 3. This orbital period of a mean 10-year cycle would place its orbit between Mars and Jupiter. 4. The observed magnetic changes or effects observed on the Sun and the Earth fluctuate between 9 and 14 years. Major UFO wave cycles also fluctuate between 9 and 14 years. 5. Geomagnetic jerks experienced on Earth fluctuate between 8 and 13 years. 6. The occurrence of earthquakes and the manifestation of UFOs seems to be in pulses – slow pulses result in random quakes and rapid pulses result in 168 major earthquakes with numerous aftershocks. Likewise, UFO events occurring the same way – isolated and numerous during a UFO wave. 7. If UFOs use Source X as a bridge or cosmic pathway to come to Earth, then Source X must behave like a door, or hole in the sky. Interestingly, Source X was mentioned in the Islamic Quran as the “gate in the sky” (see Chapter 13) and its magnetic pulses created the corridor for UFOs to come to Earth as, “pathways in the heavens”. Source X, literally speaking, is a hole in the space-time continuum. In modern understanding it is an astrophysical body. Interstellar travel could be possible with the existence of such an astrophysical body. The existence of the UFO phenomenon indicates that such a hole or gate must really exist. The only problem at this point in time is that we do not have any empirical evidence about such an object that can be used for reference and validation. However, let us take a look at an ancient text book called The Quran, which explains everything we need to know about the UFO phenomenon, the universe, other forms of intelligent life, the presence of a door in the sky and other scientific mysteries as yet unknown to us. *** 169 Chapter 13 The Universe, Aliens & Source X as Mentioned in the Islamic Quran The holy book of the Muslims called Al-Quran meaning "The Recitation" was given to prophet Mohammad (peace be upon him) more than 1400 years ago in the Arabic language. It is the Standard Operating Manual that all Muslims around the world follow. It was revealed in parts and stages according to the circumstances at the time and took 23 years to complete. The Quran consists of 114 chapters called Surahs. Its text has remained entirely unchanged till this day. The angel Gabriel was tasked to deliver the message to the Prophet Mohammad. Today his duty delivering divine messages was over, as Mohammad was the last prophet. Jesus, also mentioned in the Quran, was the second last prophet (in Islamic teachings) but is still alive and destined to return to Earth, before this planet and the entire universe (s) cosmological lifespan expires. The Quran explains the following, which is relevant to our search for an answer to the UFO mystery: 1. How the Cosmos was formed and how many universes and parallel worlds were created 2. What and how many types of intelligent beings were created 3. Space travel is possible because there are doors and pathways present 4. How the cosmos will end While the holy book spoke about most of the known prophets from Adam, Moses, Noah, Abraham, Jesus and others and finally Mohammad, it also teaches how a Muslim should behave with the do’s and don’ts in their everyday lives etc. It encompasses everything needed for a good, peaceful life, and gives a history of the prophets, life after death and the final judgment (for all the deeds and misdeeds) after resurrection. The messages given in the Quran offer us an insight into the existence of other alien life-forms, which is relevant to understanding the present day UFO phenomenon. The Quran also explains the different intelligent beings that were created and how they managed to easily traverse interstellar space to reach us. 170 No scientific text book on the market today speaks about such matters in one complete book. And this book, the Quran, interestingly, was available 1400 years ago when our understanding of the universe, the creation of all matter and science itself was still nil. Creation of the Universe The universe as we understand it was created from an initial Big Bang. It started from a single point called the singularity, which exploded and expanded outwards to form the universe and all it contents, such as galaxies, stars and planets. The universe, as today’s scientific observations show, is still expanding. The Quran confirms this fact. Let us take a look on how the Quran explained the formation of the universe (s). Remember that it takes two to tango. Nothing in this universe can evolve from just one element. There must be two components present to make everything work. Look around and we can see that all matter comes in pairs. In the formation of the universe, the two ingredients needed to start the Big Bang must be opposite in nature. The Quran explained this fact in Chapter 36; verse No: 36 Glory be to the One, who created in pairs all things that the earth produces, as well as themselves, and other things they do not know. Everything in this universe comes in pairs. The Quran explained that it can be found: 1. On Earth 2. In the human body 3. In other fields, which science has not yet discovered This Quranic verse clearly stated this even before any modern-day scientists came to this conclusion. It takes two items for everything to work in this world and the universe. Even our computers function using binary codes. While the theory of the Big Bang starts essentially from nothing- the singularity point, the Quran explains that there were actually two components already present before the Big Bang took place. The components mentioned, in layman’s language, are the earth (which means matter) and the other is smoke (which is anti-matter). To start the initial explosion or the Big Bang, these two volatile elements, matter and anti-matter must first be brought into contact. 171 The Quran explains this in Chapter 41; verse No: 11 “Then He (God) turned to the heaven when it was smoke, and said to it and to the earth, ‘Come (into being) willingly or unwillingly!’ They said, ‘We come willingly.’ As the Quranic verse clarifies, matter and antimatter were brought together by force (described as whether they liked it or not) in order to start the fusion process. The existence of these two elements shows us that space already existed even before the universe came into being. This is contrary to the idea that space did not exist before the singularity point, which would place it at the centre of a non-existence space. The condition at that moment was still in suspended animation, whereby matter and anti-matter were placed apart and not in physical contact. Time did not exist at that stage. This could be the reason that matter and antimatter were in the same space, but not in physical contact due to the lack of the progression of time. To achieve movement, matter needs space and time. Since time did not exist yet, matter and anti-matter were kept at bay. It would take some kind of force to overcome the absence of time to mix matter and anti-matter. Once matter and anti-matter were fused together, they exploded and presto; we have the Big Bang! This process caused space to expand exponentially from the very first second because of the existence of time. Time, because it has no matter, is the product of the anti-matter component. But unknown to us was the fact that while the universe expanded, another effect was also taking place. Remember that in every action there is an equal and opposite reaction? In this case we have the anti-matter component in the explosion, so this portion of anti-matter created its own opposite side of the universe, in this scenario it should be called a parallel world – another universe which runs parallel to our world/universe, occupying the same space, but in a different time frame. If this parallel world does exist, it would not be surprising if, once in a while, there were reports of strange beings that are not part of the UFO phenomenon observed in our reality. Anomalies in the separate fabric of the space-time continuum, which separates the two or more parallel worlds, can occasionally allow non-human entities to venture temporarily into our reality and perhaps some of us, given the correct time and conditions, can also be sucked into the other worlds. The Bermuda Triangle appears to be the best example of a possible environment, but the geomagnetic conditions must be right for it to happen. 172 Now back to the formation of this and other universes. As this universe expanded, all other celestial bodies begin to form as well. This process would take billions of years. Scientists have acknowledged that the universe is still expanding because they have observed the ‘red shift’ (which is sometimes associated with Doppler shift). In the 1920s, astronomer Edwin Hubble studied the movement of galaxies and observed that they were continually moving away from each other at an accelerating rate, directly proportional to the distance of the galaxy from the Earth. 1400 years ago there was no scientific equipment to observe this shift. But the Quran had already described this expanding universe. The Quran explained in Chapter 51; verse No: 47 “With power did We (God) construct the heaven, and verily, We are steadily expanding it” Now let’s come to the more interesting aspect of the universe. Our present understanding is that this is the only universe in existence and it was either formed by itself (the steady state theory) or was created by a God (expanding universe theory). Modern scientists, however, have theorized that there are possibly other parallel universes in existence as well. But unfortunately we still do not have the empirical evidence to support these claims. The Quran explains in detail that, not only do we have this universe, there are in fact seven universes all together with an equal number of parallel worlds or dimensions (called Earths in the Quran), created in conjunction with the first one. And all these universes were formed from the initial Big Bang. The Quran explained in Chapter 65, verse No:12: Allah is He Who created seven Firmaments and of the earth a similar number. Through the midst of them (all) descends His Command: that ye may know that Allah has power over all things, and that Allah comprehends, all things in (His) Knowledge. The Quran mentioned the creation of: 1. Seven Firmaments – referring to seven universes 2. Earth in similar numbers – referring to seven parallel worlds (called earths) 173 In the creation of the universe and its parallel dimensional worlds, the Quran gave two conflicting time periods i.e six days and two days. Since we are dealing with parallel universes and parallel worlds, these two different time periods should be the clue to the actual situation. The Quran explained in Chapter 50, verse No: 38: And we have created the Heavens and Earth and everything in between in six days and We were not touched by fatigue. The Quran explained in Chapter 41, verse No: 12: “So He completed them as seven firmaments in two Days, and He assigned to each heaven its duty and command. And We adorned the lower heaven with lights, and (provided it) with guard. Such is the Decree of (Him) the Exalted in Might, Full of Knowledge”. The Quran mentions as in the above verses that: 1. Heaven and Earth was created in six days 2. Heaven and Earth was created in two days The two statements above appear contradictory, but are actually telling us something that is intermixed in it. The statement that the seven universes were created in six days is not 144 hours, but the stages of time periods which are actually in billions of years. Another interesting statement in the chapter is that it says, – “.......earth a similar number”. This implies that there are also seven worlds or dimensions running in parallel with out reality. Now let’s get back to the formation process of the universe. During the initial process of fusion between matter and anti-matter, the matter component developed into the physical world while at the same instant it extracted the antimatter portion to create time. Time and space became bonded together and hence time moves relative to space. If the bondage of time and space could be interrupted, it is possible to temporally peek into the other parallel worlds. Anti-matter in the initial mix is probably in a larger volume than matter, so it would naturally take a different course during the formation process. As every action gives an equal and opposite reaction, the anti-matter portion separates itself in a process called fission, to form another universe composed only of antimatter. So in the process we have two types of universe, the physical and nonphysical, both forming in the first stage of the period called Day 1. 174 On Day 1 it was the fusion process taking place to create two different types of universe. But by Day 2, the physical world did not replicate itself, but fission took over for the non-physical world and the replication process only took another five days to complete. All together this would give us six days in total. The results giving rise to one physical universe and six parallel universes. The Quran explained in Chapter 41, verse No: 9: “Say: Is it that you deny Him [Allah] who created the Earth in two days? And you claim others to be equal to Him? He is the Lord of (all) the Worlds. "That is why the Quran says the earth was created in two days, or actually in two stages in one day. The next replication, or the fission process, occurred on Day 2. On Day 2, the fission process separated to form the third universe. Keep in mind that the second universe was formed on Day 1. Due to the excess amount of anti-matter, the process did not stop there, but continued until the seventh cosmos was created. By that time the remaining anti-matter must have been equally distributed and the seven heavens were in equilibrium. So the whole process actually took six days (or time periods). But hold on – as every action has an equal and opposite reaction, if we assume the fission process moved to the right to form the seven universes (one of which is ours), its opposite left side must also create something! In this case it is not another universe, but a parallel world or dimension, which is aptly described in Chapter 65, verse12 “.....earth a similar number”, meaning there are also seven worlds (ours being one of them). The existence of 7 heavens (universes) and 7 earths (parallel worlds) would give a figure of 14. With 14 such universes and worlds, it is not possible to get a middle cut-off point, to strategically balance all the universes-worlds in equilibrium? The existence of 13 would be the ideal number with our universe in the centre, with six universes to the right and six other dimensions to the left. This string of 13 cosmic space-time bubbles would satisfy the equilibrium needed to prevent a collapse. Please refer to Figure 47 below: 175 Figure 47: The String of Parallel Universes and Parallel Dimensions The figure above shows the arrangement of seven universes and seven parallel worlds giving a total of 13. So the general time frame would be 6 time periods (each period called a Day) to create 7 universes and seven parallel worlds. Since the formation of both of the universes and parallel worlds were governed by two different sets of space and time factors, negative and positive, the formation of all 13 universes-worlds will take 2 periods, called days in the Quran. One day for space-time in the positive acceleration where time is moving faster and the other day, negative deceleration where time moves more slowly. The time taken to complete the whole task can either be referred to as 6 days or 2 days depending on how you look at it. This is merely referring to two different formats, one is governed by space which is 6 days and the other by time which is 2 days. Space and time are the two most fundamental elements in the creation of the universe. Without either one of them, the universe cannot be formed! As an analogy, if someone claimed that he built a large house in 6 days, and we are unaware that during that period, he was building another, smaller house inside the big one, when he makes another claim that he built all of them in 2 days, one in the open that we can see and the other in secret, which we are unaware of, the two statements made would appear to be contradictory. In reality they are not. He is merely referring to the situation of space which is 6 days to complete and the other of time which is 2 days, or two time frames which ran concurrently with the 6 days. The statements about 6 days and 2 days referring to the same subject in the Quran indicates that the creation of the universe that we can see (and cannot see) 176 is not straight forward. There are other, parallel universes being formed as well. Not only that, but at the same instant a reciprocal, parallel world is also being created. Six days therefore refers to the formation with respect to space, while 2 days refers to the creation of time. Time for all the universes and parallel worlds runs at different speeds. Please refer to Figure 48 below: Figure 48: Progression of Time in two Different Cosmic Bubbles. As an example; if we venture out to space we age more slowly because time moves slower in relation to speed and distance. But if we step into a parallel dimension, say for just one hour, when we decide to get back into our reality a few days will have passed as time was moving at a faster rate. The time differences are what prevents the universes and parallel worlds from collapsing into each other and these time differences actually keep everything in a delicate balance. The statements in the Quran imply that while there are seven universes, there are also an equal number of parallel worlds being created at the same time. By right, creating seven universes should take seven days, but it only took six. From this we can deduce that when the first universe was formed (our physical universe), its opposite component, the second universe, was also being created at the same moment. So on Day 1, there were actually two universes (our universe and a parallel one) in existence plus two worlds (one is our world and the other a parallel one). In all three cosmic bubbles were formed, our universe, an opposite, parallel universe and an opposite parallel world or dimension. 177 Existence of Parallel Worlds and Parallel Universes The existence of parallel universes and parallel dimensions is indicated in Chapter 67 of the Quran; verse 4 below. It clearly explains the mode of travel for both realities. “He it is Who created the heavens and the earth in Six Days, and is moreover firmly established on the Throne (of Authority). He knows what enters within the earth and what comes forth out of it, what comes down from heaven and what mounts up to it. And He is with you wheresoever ye may be. And Allah sees well all that ye do”. The above verse from the Quran explained that: 1. “Earth” refers to parallel worlds – “one enters or exits from it” since it is located opposite our reality. 2. “Heaven” refer to parallel universes – “one descends or ascends” referring to the sky. The above statement explains the different modes needed to travel between parallel universes and parallel worlds. In the case of parallel universes, one needs to travel upwards to go to the sky (or heavens) and return downwards to get back to this Earth or universe. It is mentioned in the Quran as,–“comes down from heaven and what mounts up to it“. This would require a spaceship of some kind. However, there must be a door (an astrophysical body) which separates the parallel universes. While travelling to the parallel world, the act of going into it akin to stepping into it or coming out of it. It is referred to in the Quran as –“what enters within the earth and what comes forth out of it”. In this case, no spaceship is needed. However, there is a space-time continuum that acts like a barrier and separates the worlds (ours and that of paranormal beings). Since there is no door to connect the two (or more) worlds, only an abberation in the local geomagneticgravitational field can temporarily create a crack or pathway into the other reality. The presence of anomalous reports pertaining to paranormal events with paranormal entities is a clear indication of the existence of parallel worlds. The Quran pointed this out long before modern science has any answers to it. In fact modern science has kept its distance from paranormal apparitions. “Out-of-thisworld” events are considered as non-science to most scientists, while others, especially in the mainstream media, regard it as nonsense! 178 Our Position in the Cosmos Our present knowledge is that this is the only universe that we are aware of. However, many theories abound concerning the existence of parallel universes or a multiverse. If there are indeed seven universes as mentioned in Islam, Christianity, Judaism and other faiths, one would wonder what our position is in these seven heavens. The chapter below in the Quran clarifies our true position. Chapter 67: verse no: 5; And We have certainly beautified the nearest heaven with stars and have made [from] them what is thrown at the devils and have prepared for them the punishment of the Blaze. Chapter 41: verse 9-12: “So [Allah] decreed them as seven heavens (one above the other) in two days and revealed to each heaven its orders. And We [Allah] adorned the lowest heaven with lights, and protection. Such is the decree of the Exalted; the Knowledgeable”. Since our physical universe is filled with stars, galaxies, comets and meteors, we know that our position in the cosmos, as clarified in the Quran, is in the first layer. Our universe was the first one to be created with all of the stars, galaxies and other celestial objects. From this point, with the abundance of anti-matter, a process of fission took place to form other universes. And with reference to the entire make-up of the universes and parallel worlds, we are actually at the center of the creation or formation of all of the cosmic kingdoms that encompass parallel dimensions and universes. Creation of Other Life Forms The knowledge that we have at present says that only humans, animals, reptiles and microbes exist on planet Earth. The probability of the existence of other living life-forms on the millions of Earth-like planets in this vast universe, according to cosmologists and exobiologists, is very high indeed. The only problem, at this point in time, is that we do not have the technology to prove it either visually, technologically or mathematically. To make matters worse, although we have thousands of reports of encounters with alien-like beings in unidentified flying objects, their presence here is uninvited and non-communicative in nature, so it seems to confirm what 179 the scientists believe, and unfortunately we do not have any facts to confirm their existence. Since we only know that humans exist on Earth and there are no other beings of a similar nature on any other planets in the Solar System, how do we prove that alien life forms also exist in other far-away galaxies, on planets with similar environmental conditions like the Earth? We cannot! But the Quran explains that apart from humans being created exclusively to inhabit planet Earth, there are two other categories of being that were created before mankind. One of these was created from the components of light and were called Angels (already known to the Christians, Jews and Muslims). The other category was the Jinn, who were created from smokeless fire, only known to Muslims as mentioned below. The Quran explained in Chapter: 15, verse : 26-27 And the Jinn, We created aforetime from the smokeless flame of fire. In Surah Al Hijr verse 27 , the Quran further clarified how the Jinn were created: “And the Jinn We created before from scorching fire”. The Quran also said that there are many types or species of the Jinn as highlighted in Chapter 72, verse no: 11; There are among us some that are righteous, and some the contrary; we are groups each having a different way . The UFO phenomenon presents us with a wide variety of humanoid beings that come in various shapes and sizes. Space scientists estimated that the number of alien life forms in the universe number in the billions. The Quran mentions that there are many species of intelligent beings known as the Jinn. All of these three sources, the UFO subject, exobiologists and the Quran, are in agreement on the existence of other life forms apart from humans. Another thing to note is the existence of Satan. While most believed that Satan was a fallen angel, the Quran explains that Satan was in fact a species of Jinn. This is found in Chapter 18; verse no: 50. And (remember) when We said to the angels; “Prostrate to Adam.” So they prostrated except Iblis (Satan). He was one of the Jinn; he disobeyed the Command of his Lord. Satan in Islam means the Evil One, but his actual name was Iblis; Satan is the name given to his evil nature. 180 So this species of the Jinn was identified based on its behavior. His refusal to respect Adam caused the wrath of God. The Quran also mentions that Satan is also found both in the Jinn and humankind. So some humans actually had the same satanic nature too (not in its look, but behaviour). In reality the only intelligent beings created were the Angels, Jinn and mankind. It should be kept in mind that Satan is from the Jinn family. Since the Jinn consisted of many categories, Satan appeared to be detached from the overall Jinn creation. Satan appears to be much closer to angels, which makes people assume that Satan was a fallen angel. But it is not the case, as the Quran states that Satan was created from fire while Angels were created from light. The other special type of beings were the Angels. Their composition is not mentioned in the Quran, however, prophet Mohamad explained that they were made from light. The Quran mentioned only some of the features of the Angels as mentioned in Chapter 35, verse no: 1: All the praises and thanks be to Allah, the (only Originator, or the only) Creator) of the heavens and the earth, Who made the angels messengers with wings, – two or three or four. He increases in creation what He wills. Verily, Allah is Able to do all things. From these three categories of living beings, Angels consist of various different classes based on their size and the number of wings that they have. This also included the type of duties that they were tasked to perform. From this we can speculate that angels traverse the universes with the aid of their wings. No flying machines were needed. Since Angels were created from light, they could penetrate this universe and other parallel ones with ease. Their wings cannot be compared to those of birds, which need air as a medium to maintain lift and speed, their wings were more for initiating forward movement. Their flight was unhindered by the physical properties of gravity and could achieve astonishing speeds. The Quran mentions this in Chapter 70; verse no: 4. “The angels and the Spirit ascend to Him in a day, the measure of which is fifty thousand years”. Even before Einstein’s Theory of Relativity predicted time dilation when traveling in space, the Quran mentioned this 1400 years ago. Jinn on the other hand were created in a way very similar to humans, in the sense that their anatomy is similar to humans. 181 There are males and females and they also breed like humans. The only difference involved certain parts of their anatomy which developed according to the nature of their planetary environment, such as big eyes, thin torso, pale skin etc. The Quran mentions that the Jinn have the ability to traverse interstellar space in their quest for knowledge (mentioned in the Quran as trying to hear or steal the secrets of the universe from the Angels). In their quest, the Jinn encountered meteors (as mentioned in Chapter 72; verse 9 below). This also gave us a clue that this type of the Jinns were probably the inhabitants of this physical universe. “And we used to sit on places (high) therein to listen. Whoever listens now finds a flame in wait for him”. An open challenge made in the Quran was directed to both the Jinn and mankind to penetrate the universe in Chapter 55 verse no. 33: “O assembly of Jinn and mankind, If you are able to penetrate beyond the realms of the heavens and the earth, then penetrate. You cannot penetrate without power”. The word ‘power’ in the above verse denotes technology. Since the Jinn were created long before humans, they were technologically advanced and already had the ability to fly from one star system to another with ease. Their mode of space travel would look exactly like the UFOs widely reported on Earth today! The Jinn were made up of many categories and types. Satan, being a species of the Jinn family is of a higher order, but there are other types of Jinn which are almost human-like. Take for example, the Jinn that worked for King Solomon in building mega structures referred to in Chapter 27: Verse 17; “And there were gathered together unto Solomon his armies of the Jinn and humankind, and of the birds, and they were set in battle order” And in Chapter 34: Verse 13; “They worked for him as he desired, (making) arches, images, basins as large as reservoirs, and (cooking) cauldrons fixed (in their places): "Work ye, sons of David, with thanks! but few of My servants are grateful!" Interactions between Jinn and mankind most probably took place before the reign of Solomon. Interaction between the Jinn and humans must have been commonplace in the ancient past. 182 This would explain how, for example, the Dogon tribe in Mali knew about the Sirius star system and other ancient cultures and were well verse in cosmological matters. If interactions between humans and the Jinn still take place today, we can speculate that the Jinn are manifesting in the form of the occupants of UFOs! So UFOs therefore must originate from the Jinn. According to the Quran, there is no other species that resemble humans other than the Jinn, because they are our counterparts in this universe and in the hereafter both in heaven and hell. This is shown in this verse: Chapter 51; verse 56” “I created the Jinn and humankind only that they might worship Me”. All Life Forms and Elements in the Cosmos were Created in Pairs If we look around us, all things, objective and subjective, comes in pairs. We have male and females for both humans and plants, night and day, good and bad, the visible and non-visible etc. If we look into the human body and its primary building block of DNA, this is made up of combined nucleotide pairs of ATCG. Matter is also created in pairs i.e. with its opposite pair consisting of anti-matter. And when we look at the universe, its pair, the unseen universe, is still beyond our comprehension and the existence of the UFO phenomenon shows us that there could be other hidden universes as well. Regarding the concept that everything in the universe comes in pairs, this is what the Quran said in Chapter 51, verse no. 49; “And of everything We have created pairs.” Also in Chapter 36 , verse no. 36, also says: “Glory to Allah, Who created in pairs all things that the earth produces, as well as their own (human) kind and (other) things of which they have no knowledge.” The Quran explains that all matter was created in pairs. We are aware of most of the pairs, but there are many more of them that we have no knowledge of at present. The UFO phenomenon is one of them. As far as intelligent life is concerned, there are only three types of being in the universe – Angels, Jinn and mankind. As the Quran stresses, everything in the universe comes in pairs, or opposite pairs, and this raises the question; do Angels, Jinn and humans have their own opposite pairs? 183 At the highest level we know that if there are Angels then there is Satan. Satan is not one single entity, but is a large group called Iblis. The word Satan in Arabic means Evil. So Angels and Satan make up the opposite pair with opposite characters. So they provide the balance between good and bad. Are the Jinn the opposite of mankind? Yes, but there are two pairs of them – the physical ones and the non-physical ones. The Jinn must have their own opposite pair i.e. the Jinn with a physical body like humans and the opposite pair made from anti-matter. In Malaysia there are numerous reports of encounters with spiritual beings from a parallel world. Locally they are called the ‘Bunian people’. They are humanlike in nature, speak the local language, wear almost the same type of attire, but they are not from this world. Their appearance in our reality is transient. Time and space seems to limit their appearance in our world. The Bunians are the most logical candidate for the human pair as far as Malaysia is concerned. In other parts of the world there should have been occasional reports of encounters with other non-human entities. Entities from the unseen world should also exist as they represent our pair on the other side of the space-time continuum. If we check out other paranormal events happening in other countries, you will find that our local environment is sharing the same space with another form of reality. We have to ask questions about Leprecauns, Fairies and other entities that have been encountered. If people have seen them, then they must be our missing pairs from the other side of reality. The Bunian beings in Malaysia, just like the UFO occupants, like to abduct humans to their parallel world. They do not have any flying machines. They seem to appear out of nowhere into our reality. Humans that have been taken, invited or abducted into the Bunian parallel world, were usually absent from this world for about 5-7 days. This is similar to the time that some UFO abductees went missing. The physical and psychological effects are the same – tired, dizzy, thirsty and with temporary amnesia. This is the direct result of being in a different time frame in a parallel world, where time moved faster and produced the observed effects. Remember that the Bunians are not UFO entities from the stars. This is a good indicator that there are other unseen world (s) running parallel to ours. To say that the Bunians are our opposite pairs would be correct, as the Bunians are composed of anti-matter while we, humans, are made of matter. 184 So too are the Jinn. If UFO occupants are the physical form of the Jinn, then there must be a non-physical form of the Jinn as well. Satan is the best example, and is invisible. Time Dilation It is a known scientific fact that travelling to distant galaxies will result in time dilation. Experimentally, time dilation is the difference in elapsed time measured by two clocks, either due to them having a velocity relative to each other, or having a gravitational potential difference between their locations. This concept was derived from Einstein’s Theory of Relativity. In relativity theory, time slows down in direct proportion to speed. People on Earth will age faster when compared to someone travelling in a spaceship. Time dilation, however, is explained in the Quran in Chapter: 70 verse No: 4, in a different context in the sense that different time frames exist on Earth and in the heavens. “ The angels and the Spirit ascend to Him in a day, the measure of which is fifty thousand years”. However, in Chapter 32, verse 5, there is a different time frame involved. “He regulates all affairs from the heaven to the earth. Then they ascend to Him in a day, the measure of which is a thousand years as you count”. Here is a clue that in space travel time could be shortened! The distance to the highest heaven remains the same, but the time factor differed. What is missing in this picture? It probably lies with the beginning of the sentence in the verse i.e. “He regulates all affairs from the heaven to the earth”. In normal circumstances it will take 50,000 years (according to the Quran) to reach the highest universe. But with the presence of a “regulator”, the time could be cut down to only 1000 years. So what could this regulator be? Planets, the Sun or any celestial object cannot regulate, determine or control any form of space travel, except to use their gravitational influence to swing past them. So this “regulator” must be in an astrophysical form, akin to but not identical to a Black Hole. To explain the great number of UFOs visiting Earth over the centuries, only the presence of an astrophysical “regulator” of some kind can bridge the gap of long-distance interstellar travel. We shall call this “regulator” Source X. 185 The presence of this regulator could explain why there are spates, flurries and waves of UFO sightings scattered across the globe from time to time. The “regulator” behaves like a gate or window that opens and shuts at certain intervals. In astrophysical terms, Source X is actually pulsating and hence releasing energy. This energy provides UFOs the electromagnetic medium needed to sustain their flight. This same energy burst can cause earthquakes on Earth and also on all nearby planets. Many UFO researchers have long noticed the close relationship between UFO sightings and earth tremors. One good example was the large earthquake which struck Chile in 2017 and resulted in numerous UFO sightings all across the country. If Source X existed, it is the common denominator for the two nonidentical events. While time dilation works in this universe according to the theory of relativity, it does not work in other parallel universes as it is governed by another form of physics. The creation of parallel universes is based on the progressive slowing down of time, while the formation of parallel worlds is based on the speeding up of time. These two positive and negative time frames keep our physical universe stable as the opposite times balanced each other out. If going into the Bunian world, which is a step away from our world, causes a time factor of about 5 day difference, then the same time factor appears to be consistent with UFO abductees in experiencing the same 5 days time dilation. In the Travis Walton case in 1975 for example, thought that he was in the UFO for less than an hour, in reality 5 days had gone by. There is a time dilation element involved whether one is abducted by a UFO or into the Bunian world. Time appears to be running at a different pace. Since the witnesses state that they were in the Bunian world, or abducted by a UFO for only a few hours, in reality they were missing for 5 days. This shows that time in both the Bunian and in some UFO abduction scenarios, is moving faster. Another phenomenon which is relevant here, is that in Malaysia, sometimes after some abnormally bad weather, people find mysterious, large non-human footprints in the ground. There were only a few of these footprints, so it appears as if entities from a parallel world just stepped into our reality for a brief moment before stepping back into their world. This raises the question of how many parallel world are actually out there? The Quran had clarified that there are six! 186 Interstellar Travel In the 21st century, mankind is still struggling to venture into space. We are literally still crawling to the nearest planet in the Solar System. We still lack the technology and the advanced propulsion systems to take us to the galaxies. Even before we knew that air or wind can be a medium to support heavy objects in flight using some kind of forward thrust and an aerodynamic wing design, the Quran explained that interstellar travel is possible. Refer to Chapter : 55, verse 33; “O assembly of Jinn and mankind, If you are able to penetrate beyond the realms of the heavens and the earth, then penetrate. You cannot penetrate without power”. The Quran challenges both the Jinn and mankind to conquer space, but they can only do that provided that they have the technology. As UFOs originate from the skies and have succeeded in reaching Earth, it appears that the challenge was achieved by the occupants of the UFOs, which is indicative that they were from the Jinn species that had won the Quranic challenge. However, as the universe is such a vast expanse, even travelling close to the speed of light any intelligent extraterrestrial beings cannot reach Earth in the numbers that we have seen. There has to be a short-cut, or a special corridor or highway in space. The Quran in Chapter 51: verse 7-8, specifically mentions that there are paths or superhighways in the universe. “By the sky possessing paths. You are in speech differing!” If such highways exist, we have no knowledge whatsoever to their nature. We can only speculate that these highways must be electromagnetic in nature – you cannot see it, but it is there. Flying objects which operate on certain electromagnetic frequencies can utilize this highway. If trains depend on the railway tracks to move, likewise UFOs require electromagnetic energy waves to slide along to traverse interstellar space. The direct result of the existence of this space highway, is that UFO manifestations on Earth would be distributed along straight lines therefore Orthoteny is a valid observation. There are numerous sightings of UFOs reportedly sitting motionless in the sky as if waiting for something before brightening up and accelerating away into space at a phenomenal speed. They could possibly be waiting for this 187 ever changing orientation of the magnetic highways to pass their specific location before jumping into it. The presence of orthotenic lines on Earth confirms this. For this highway to exist, it must be associated with some kind of astrophysical body. Once you are in it, any destination would be within your reach, provided that the highway was pointed at your intended destination. A Wormhole would best fit the description. The occurrence of UFO waves about once a year and the daily, random, isolated cases of UFO sightings on Earth seems to indicate that this superhighway is at times in a favorable orientation towards Earth. If the orientation holds for a certain period of time, UFO waves will occur. But if it keeps changing its position every few minutes, only a few isolated UFO sighting are reported and this is what we are seeing. The existence of a superhighway needs a source to provide the necessary energy. This energy source can only come from an astrophysical object most probably in the form of a compact mass, which is what the Source X mentioned in this book is all about. Existence of A Door in Space From the superhighway theory and its source, its point of origin would behave like a door or window in space. While Source X is gravitationally strong enough to curve space and time, it is compact and the energy beam would have to originate from its poles. The poles are the actual hole in space. We have theories about Black Holes and Wormholes. While a Black Hole, due to its massive gravity can suck up matter in its vicinity, Wormholes on the other hand, as the theory suggests, can provide a shortcut and pathway to other galaxies and universes. The existence of Black Holes has been scientifically confirmed, while Wormholes are still on the drawing board. The Quran, however, explains that there are gates or holes in the sky. Refer to Chapter 7: verse no. 40: Those who repudiate our proofs and are proud towards them. For them the gates of the sky will not be opened nor will they enter the garden any more than a twisted rope can pass through the eye of a needle. And thus we requite the evildoers. 188 The Quran mentions the existence of “gates in the sky”, which were not one but many. Just like many other astrophysical objects, there were many of them scattered all across the universe. So too it appears for the gates in the sky. The presence of the UFO phenomenon is a clear indication that such gates really do exist. If UFOs are from some distant galaxy or universe, the presence of these gates or holes in the sky, could provide us the much needed answer as to how UFOs can reach us in such a short span in time. We can forget about faster-thanlight travel due to the speed limitations, but if there are “holes” or “doors” in space, providing short cuts, this speed limitation can be ignored. The occurrence of UFO waves further strengthens the possibility that there are “gates” in the sky, which when open, result in large numbers of UFOs passing through. When this gate closes, the number of UFO sightings on Earth dwindles. These gates can be open or closed, in other words they are pulsating with energy beams. More pulses result in more UFOs jumping into the electromagnetic beam. John Keel looked at these types of UFO cluster events as something akin to a window. He termed them as ‘window areas’, where there were persistent sightings of UFOs or their occupants in the same geographical area. UFOs seem to have an affinity for certain areas while other areas are ignored. In Chapter 86: verse 1-3 below, the Quran further stresses the existence of ‘doors’ which originate from a star. This star, probably after undergoing an implosive astrophysical process, turns into a hole or puncture in the space-time continuum, which gives it the piercing energy beam that causes earthquakes and creates a moving corridor in space. “By the sky and the Târiq. And what can make you know what the Târiq is? It is the piercing star”. End of the Universe That this universe started with a Big Bang is a scientific fact. But how it will end is another story. Everything that exists in this universe has a predetermined shelf-life. Celestial objects have a longer lifespan when compared to biological beings. But finally, long or short, all will have to come to an end. According to cosmologists and astrophysicists, the universe will end either as a Big Crunch, whereby the expansion of the universe eventually reverses and finally collapses or the universe continues to expand until its density thins out and finally cools down and dies. 189 The cosmological evidence does not support the former theory, but the latter seems to be well accepted. But the Quran however gives a third explanation. The Quran explains in Chapter 21: verse 104, how the universe will end, expire or disintegrate. “The day we roll up the sky. Like the rolling up of a scroll for the laws. As we began the first creation we will repeat it. A promise upon us: We are to do it.” How the Quran explains the end of the universe, sheds some light on the nature of this universe itself. The Quran mentions that the universe began like rolling out a carpet or a scroll. This means that the universe (s) was/were flat. The universe will end and it will be rolled back again, repeating its initial formation process. Is our universe round or flat? Scientists are divided on this. But the majority are convinced that it is flat. Various observations since the early 2000s have shown that our universe is very nearly flat. New measurements of the cosmic microwave background made in 2020 by the Atacama Cosmology Telescope found that the universe is indeed flat. This is in total agreement with the statement made in the Quran. The Quran described the universe in simple term understandable to all – like a carpet or a scroll, which meant that it is flat. It is only in this flat format that it is possible to roll up the universe. If the universe was elliptical or round-like in nature, this would not be possible. If you roll it, it will just keep moving and there is no way this universe can be disposed of! Rolling up the universe is the last stage of the process. But before that happens, the Quran explains the cosmological changes that will take place. It is described in simple layman’s language and only an astrophysicist or a cosmologist can have a scientific grasp of it. See the verses below describing what will happen. Chapter 25: verse 25 And [mention] the Day when the heaven will split open with [emerging] clouds, and the angels will be sent down in successive descent. Chapter 52: verse 9 The day the sky will be utterly shaken Chapter 55: verse 37-38 190 And when the sky is rent asunder and becomes rosy like oil. Then which of the blessings of your lord will you repudiate? The universe (s) started from the initial Big Bang and as with all forms of matter and energy, with time and momentum, it will finally slow down and dissipate. The energy that initially sustained the universe (s) cannot maintain its delicate balance forever. There will come a time when the energy will be exhausted or die down, just like all celestial bodies. Conclusion In summation, we see that the Quran indicates or points to the existence of the UFO phenomenon based on the following statements: Table 13: Statements from the Quran verses the Observations of the UFO Phenomenon Statements from Quran There are seven universes and seven parallel worlds There are two other forms of intelligent beings created besides human i.e Angels and Jinn There are many types of Jinn Jinn can interact with humans. Solomon, in the ancient past, used the Jinn to build mega-structures. The Jinn are capable of interstellar travel The Jinn like to abduct humans UFO Observations UFOs, alien beings, ghosts, bigfoot and other paranormal beings must be coming from these unknown universes and parallel worlds. If UFO related beings are real, then they are from the Jinn type and not Angels. There are many diverse types of UFO related beings sighted in the form of various shapes & sizes UFO related beings have interacted with humans on countless occasions both during the past and into the modern era. Ancient tribes have knowledge of the cosmos. They must have received the knowledge from an extraterrestrial source i.e. the Jinn UFOs and its operators can operate with ease in space. They have reached Earth. UFO related beings do abduct humans on numerous occasions. 191 With the hundreds of documented UFOs reports and encounters with alien humanoid beings made across the globe, these observations validate and confirm the statements found in the Quran. To make the case even more convincing and acceptable, we need a scientific text book which could explain in detail all the relevant verses from the Quran pertaining to our subject matter. With this, not only do UFOs and alien humanoids have a place in our reality, but this will also confirm the possible existence of paranormal beings from other parallel world. The universe (s) in fact is really teeming with life of all forms. Chapter 42, verse 30, confirmed this fact. “And among His Signs is the creation of the heavens and the earth, and of whatever living creatures He has spread forth in both. And He has the power to gather them together whenever he pleases.” Even though we might have the preconceived notion that the Quran is merely an insignificant piece of ancient literature more than 1400 year old, the many revelations made in it are referring to scientific facts which can be checked and validated. Of significance are the possibilities of the existence of parallel worlds and parallel universes, which at present only exist as unproven scientific theories, or as science fiction fantasies. In our search for an answer to the UFO enigma, we desperately need the full knowledge of the formation of the universe, the creation of other intelligent beings beside humans, the existence of special flight paths or corridors in space and the presence of a door or short cut to other universes and realities. Armed with all these knowledge, only then can we conclusively sum up the UFO mystery that has faced mankind over millennium. As no scientific text book exists today explaining on the subject matter, only the Quran, at this point in time, provides the best answer. Only time will tell as to its validity, once our scientific understanding of all matters mentioned above have been fully comprehended and confirmed scientifically, then what is mentioned in the Quran will become much clearer. The Quran provides the information needed to fill in the blanks where our understanding of the Universe is missing. In trying to understand the UFO phenomenon, the ancient texts in Arabic provide much needed answers. 192 The key to confirm the existence of UFOs and their possible relationship with earthquakes, is the detection and confirmation of the existence of Source X, an astrophysical body situated somewhere, relatively nearby, in the Solar System. If the existence of UFOs and alien beings are considered too far-fetched, controversial, the presence of Source X, or a door in the sky in our own backyard, will be much harder to fathom as it sounds like science fiction, because we are unaware of such a celestial body in the Solar System or anywhere else. The fact that we cannot explain how far-away alien beings (UFOs) can reach Earth with ease and regularity, and we cannot predict earthquakes with the aid of modern technology, just points to the possibility that Source X really is out there! Because we had no knowledge that it was even there, it took the UFO phenomenon and its relationship with earthquakes to indicate its existence. *** 193 Chapter 14 The UFO Jigsaw Puzzle Solved! The UFO mystery that has confronted us over the years is like a piece of a large jigsaw puzzle. We have most of the pieces, but it is not possible to put them together to see the big picture. This is because some of the pieces are still missing, so the next thing to do is to look for them. These missing pieces, interestingly, were already available in the fields of seismology, astronomy, cosmology, astrophysics and theology. With this additional information it should finally be possible to piece them all together. The first few pieces came from the UFO phenomenon itself. It contains the following important clues: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. UFOs are mainly nocturnal events. UFOs appear in two forms, either single or in clusters. UFOs are distributed along straight lines. UFOs are electromagnetic in nature. Once a year UFOs appear in large numbers known as ‘UFO waves’. UFO waves move around the Earth in a mean 10-year cycle. UFO appearances are associated with seismic fault lines. Next in line is seismology. Over the years many UFO researchers have observed that UFOs tend to be sighted before, during, or after earthquakes. So naturally it appears that there must be a relationship between UFO sightings and earth tremors. So what could it be? The immediate tendency is the suspicion that UFOs are causing the quakes. But that was not the case. Seismology offer the following pertinent pieces of information: 1. 2. 3. 4. Earth tremors are common during nocturnal hours. Earthquakes can be single, isolated events or clusters. On average there is one large earthquake each year. Earthquakes are associated with fault lines. Next is the Sun. The Sun exhibits the following significant pieces of the puzzle: 1. The Sun creates events called sunspots. 2. Sunspots occur in 11 year cycles. 194 3. The Sun’s magnetic field reverses every 11 years. 4. The magnetic field returns to its original position every 22 years. Besides the unexplained UFO phenomenon on Earth, there are other geophysical events that require scrutiny. They are: 1. 2. 3. 4. The Earth’s magnetic field is weakening. The geomagnetic north pole wanders each year in one direction. The Earth’s magnetic poles reverse over thousands of years. The Earth suffers from ‘geomagnetic jerks’ on average every 10 years. The changes observed on the Sun and the Earth require answers from the fields of cosmology and astrophysics. Is there anything in the cosmos that could trigger or contribute to the UFO phenomenon, earthquakes, sunspots and the Sun’s magnetic poles reversal? At present we see none. All that we have are harmless planets, moons, asteroids, comets, stars and galaxies. If UFOs and earthquakes are related, is there something in the cosmos that we are unaware of? There is, there are supermassive, menacing objects called Black Holes. If these objects were situated close to us, they would cause us sleepless nights. But due to their distance, they do not contribute to the puzzle of the UFO mystery. So we have to turn to our own backyard, the Solar System. Is there anything interesting or significant happening in the Solar System besides the occasional solar flare, corona mass ejection (CMEs) and the periodic conjunction of the planets? So, apart from the clockwork-like firework display of meteor showers, all seems quiet. But is our Solar System actually quiet? Perhaps now, but not in the distant past. A localized ‘big bang’ may have taken place, because we can see evidence of it in the pock marks and craters on the moon and these are a clear indication that this may indeed have taken place in the past. Prehistoric animals on the Earth were also suddenly wiped out. Chunks of rocks must have been dispersed in every direction by the hypothetical explosion. Remnants of these space rocks can be seen today, scattered across the Asteroid Belt. Occasionally some of these rocks are perturbed out of their orbits and come hurling towards Earth as meteors. So something is not quite right in the Solar System and we need to identify this important missing piece of the puzzle. 195 What is missing in our Solar System? Take a look again on how the planets are distributed in the Solar System. The planets obey the Titius-Bodes Law on planetary distances from the Sun. All the planets from the Sun to Jupiter were formed and took their appropriate respective orbital positions. But after Jupiter, the other three outer planets, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune were pushed further out from the Sun. Something near to Jupiter must have caused this planetary displacement. It could either be that the hypothetical planet between Mars and Jupiter must have vanished, or it could have transformed itself from a planetary body into something quite different. If that was the situation, the torque effect and gravitational pull would result with the three outer planets mentioned, being drawn closer to Jupiter (and the Sun). However, if it had transformed itself, and was still there, it would exert sufficient force to push the three planets away from the Sun, because it had presumably become the second most influential body in the Solar System. The next question is if Source X (or the missing planet, in whatever it turned into), is still out there between Mars and Jupiter? The answer is a resounding yes! This is because something with an orbital period of 9-14 years (as seen in the UFO wave cycle) could possibly be influencing the Sun (inducing the sunspots and magnetic reversals) and the Earth (the earthquakes, geomagnetic jerks and weakening of the magnetic field). And this orbital period,which represents an unknown source, would place Source X between Mars and Jupiter. Observed Events on Earth and the Sun The observed periodicity of major UFO waves fluctuates between 9 and 14 years. And the upheavals on the Sun, i.e. the observable presence of the number of sunspots occurring in an 11 year cycle. However, in reality it actually waxes and wanes over 9 and 14 years. The internal processes in the Sun too, either run on a ‘dynamo effect’, or they could also be induced externally every 11 years to change its polarity. The Earth experiences the unexplained geomagnetic jerks about once every 8 to 13 years (with enough data it could also be between 9 and 14 years). The timing of the events on the Earth and the Sun, seem to show that major UFO waves, sunspots, geomagnetic jerks and the Sun’s magnetic field reversals are somehow inter-related and they seem to be triggered at about the same time, (i.e. 9-14 196 years). If there is a common stimulus, then it must be external to the Earth and the Sun. Let’s take a closer look at the synchronicity of the latitude shifting trends seen in major UFO waves and large earthquakes. It indicates that there could be two types of energy at play here, one gravitational (in causing earthquakes) and the other electromagnetic (causing UFO waves). As shown in Chapter 10, for a period of about 10 years, UFO waves and large earthquakes are synchronized to follow the same trend moving up and down the latitudes. After that they split apart and follow different latitudes for another 10 years. Then about 20 years later, both events are once again synchronized. This piece of the puzzle appears to imitate the magnetic pole reversal in the Sun. The Sun’s magnetic poles changes its polarity every 11 years. But after two cycles or 22 years, the magnetic poles returns to its original polarity. These observations indicate that UFO waves, large earthquakes, sunspots and the Sun’s magnetic pole reversals have a common trigger. If four different events (UFOs, earthquakes, sunspots and magnetic pole reversals) are observed on two separate celestial bodies, the influencing factor must be coming from a third body! This is a very significant piece of the puzzle and we must look to astronomy again for the answer. We have to return to the position of the missing planet between Mars and Jupiter. As all objects in the universe follow the same physical laws, i.e. they adhere to the same principles of physics, then the Titius-Bodes Law would hold true for the position of all the planets in the Solar System, if a planet had once existed between Mars and Jupiter (which it should). Since there is a vacant position at a distance of 2.8 AU from the Sun because of the missing planet, this could reciprocally change the planetary distances for the planets after Jupiter due to the simple cause and effect. If the missing planet X had transformed into another body, its original position at 2.8 AU from the Sun (based on the Titius-Bodes Law) would no longer apply as it is no longer a planet (with its planetary properties) but something else with new set of physical characteristics). This ‘something else’ appears to be closer to Jupiter since its orbit is between 9 and 11 years. However, its presence did not displace or push Jupiter further away from the Sun however the three outer planets were affected. 197 What happened, can be seen as the next piece in the puzzle, whereby the 10-year UFO wave cycle can be interpreted as the effect of the orbit of Source X between Mars and Jupiter. It had perturbed at 23.5 degrees to the plane of the ecliptic. While all other planets orbit the Sun along the ecliptic plane, the orbit of Source X is highly elliptical (as can be seen by the UFO wave cycles). This indicates that it is not a planet, but appears to have an orbit like a comet (but it is not). This orientation will not place Source X on a collision course with Jupiter. Incidentally, the 23.5 degrees orientation of Source X is the same as the axis tilt of the Earth. Did the magnetic nature of Source X cause the Earth to tilt when it was formed in the early history of the Solar System? For this to happen, Source X must be a body that behaves like a powerful magnet. Its orbit around the Sun, and hence around the Earth, would have a demagnetizing effect to not only tilt the Earth, but also cause the Earth’s magnetic poles to reverse. The magnetic pole reversal of the Earth has occurred before this thousands of years ago and the next one will not occur for several thousand more years. In the meantime, the Earth’s magnetic north pole is shifting away from Canada towards Siberia. Something is pushing it westwards. The Sun too changes its magnetic poles every 11 years. So it seems that it is not only the Earth that is affected by the magnetization effect from Source X, but the Sun too. To add to the missing pieces, sunspots appear on the surface of the Sun in 11-year cycles. Sunspots are magnetic in nature and can only be caused by another, stronger magnetic source. If sunspots are externally induced i.e. from outside the Sun, then Source X also has the ability to excite the Sun’s powerful magnetic fields. This demonstrates that Source X is an energetic magnetic source. What happens is actually not a dynamo effect within the Sun, but the influence of a demagnetizing effect from an outside magnetic source causing the magnetic field of the Sun to switch its poles. These are the pieces of the puzzle that appear to give us a better perspective on our situation in trying to explain the UFO enigma. But more pieces are needed. The missing pieces of the jigsaw puzzle which remain to be explained must come from cosmology and astrophysics: 1. How was the universe (s) formed? We still do not know the true makeup of the cosmos. 2. Are there any other intelligent beings in the cosmos? We have no knowledge of this at the moment. 198 3. If there are other forms of intelligent biological beings, how do they traverse the universe? We have no technology for such deep space excursions. 4. Due to the limitations of speed against vast interstellar distances, are there any natural short-cuts present in space? We know that massive celestial objects can curve or bend space, but we have no empirical evidence to show that these short cuts exist. 5. If there were indeed short cuts in space, these “holes or doors” are not enough to permit interstellar travel. There should be something else present akin to the “trade winds”, which would act as electromagnetic tracks to aid interstellar travel. We are still in the dark about this. Without the above five pieces of the big cosmological picture, it is not possible to explain the existence of the UFO phenomenon. Perhaps we can find the missing pieces in the field of theology. Since there are still many more surprises about this universe about which we have no knowledge (as our science is still progressing), the missing pieces of the puzzle to solve the UFO mystery, unfortunately they cannot be found in any of our current scientific text books. Due to this knowledge limitation, we need to look at the ancient texts that are available to us for reference. One of them is called the Quran. Interestingly it contains the answers to the five points mentioned above. The Quran makes reference to the creation of the universe (s), other intelligent beings, space travel (with its short cuts) and the presence of electromagnetic pathways or superhighways. It is laid out in simple layman’s language and it offers modern scientists the chance to interpret them in scientific technicalcosmological terms. The statements from the Quran are there to be scientifically scrutinised, tested, verified and confirmed. When all of the missing pieces of the UFO jigsaw puzzle are pieced together, only then can we say that UFOs, earthquakes, sunspots, the magnetic reversals of the Sun and Earth share a common denominator. To get an insight of the UFO mystery, let’s sum up the missing pieces of the puzzle. 1. We have the UFO Phenomenon, but with no definitive answer. 2. We have earthquakes, but no solution for their prediction. 3. We have sunspots, but the theory attributes them to an internal process. 199 4. We have magnetic field reversals in the Sun and the theory associates with the dynamo effect. 5. We see geomagnetic jerks in the Earth with the cause still unknown. 6. We see the Earth’s magnetic poles drifting to the west. We are not sure why. While all forms of sickness in the human body originate from within the body, the actual stimulus or cause is external. We have microbes, viruses, radiation, carcinogens, lack of nutrition, traumas and physical stress and the body is just the receiver: so too are the Earth and the Sun. What do they all have in common? 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. UFO waves occur once a year. Large earthquakes happen on average once a year. Sunspots have an 11-year cycle (it fluctuates between 9 and14 years) The Sun’s magnetic field reverses every 11 years and is synchronised every 22 years. The Earth’s geomagnetic jerks happen about once every 10 years (it fluctuates between 8 and 13 years). Major UFO wave occur on average every 10 years (it fluctuates between 9 and 14 years). Large earthquakes and major UFO waves shift up and down the latitudes over time (they fluctuate every 10 years and synchronize about every 20 years). Sunspots occur at the mid-latitudes during maximum sunspot activity, but moves to the sun’s equator during minimum sunspot activity, (it fluctuates in 11 year cycles). Based on the above observations, it appears that an unknown body exists in the Solar System, which stimulates or triggers the events seen on Earth and the Sun. This is the most important piece of the puzzle which can conclusively combine what occurs on the Earth and the Sun. The presence of this unknown body could also explain the existence of the UFO phenomenon. What is missing? 1. There is a missing planet at 2.8 A.U from the Sun according to the TitiusBodes Law. 2. Incidentally, major UFO cycles indicate the orbit of a hypothetical body between Mars and Jupiter at about 2.8 A.U from the Sun. The existence of 200 this body (or Source X), however, is only hypothetical and cannot be confirmed at present. 3. There is no solid evidence to show that a planet had once existed or dissipated at 2.8 A.U from the Sun. The situation is still unclear, but the existence of ‘Source X’ could fill in the blanks. What we still do not know 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. How the cosmos was formed. Are there parallel universes and parallel worlds? Are there any other type of intelligent beings in the universe? Is space travel practical, and can it be done in a short span of time? Are there short cuts or doors in the sky? For the answers to all the above questions we need to take a look at ancient literature, which could provide us with the much needed information. One of the ancient texts or manuscripts which is accessible to all, but is written in Arabic is the Quran. Its text has remained unchanged for the past 1400 years. It is still in its original form. What the Quran tells us: 1. Matter and anti-matter already existed in suspended animation before the Big Bang. 2. Seven universes and seven parallel worlds were created from the Big Bang, with the initial fusion of matter and anti-matter. After that process fission took over (a reciprocal effect) with the creation of parallel universes and parallel worlds in a string of 13 cosmic bubbles. 3. Besides mankind, there are two other types of beings. One is Angels, the other are the Jinn. The Jinn are very similar to humans, not necessarily in their looks but in other aspects. 4. The Jinn were scattered all across the universe 5. The Jinn have the technology for interstellar excursions (they were created much earlier than humans). 6. There are short cuts created in space referred to as ‘Doors’. 7. There are pathways in space to use for interstellar travel. 8. A ‘piercing star’ exists, (the Quran does not explain what it is for). If we combine all the above we see that they are interconnected. The primary or common denominator is Source X, a body which contributes to all the observed effects on Earth and the Sun. With this, we can conclude that: 201 1. UFOs are real. They belong to the Jinn species (Jamaludin, 1981; Creighton, 1983). 2. The Jinns were created thousand of years before mankind had attained sufficient technological progress. We see them as UFOs that operate in air, water and vacuum. The fact that they reached Earth in large numbers over the years is an astounding achievement. On the other hand, the fact that our scientific community cannot accept the reality of UFOs is still a mystery to many of us. 3. UFOs came to Earth through a door in the sky and that is why they are usually found concentrated in a specific geographical region. 4. UFOs operate along electromagnetic pathways (seen as orthotenic line on Earth and a straight super-highway in space). 5. UFOs operation is limited here on Earth as the entry-exit door opens and shuts at intervals. This process comes in the form of energy pulses. Slow pulses mean a small number of UFOs and earthquakes. Rapid pulses cause UFO waves and large quakes. If the pulses are rapid and continuous we can expect a UFO invasion to take place as the space/time factor has been changed. 6. The ‘piercing star’ mentioned in the Quran probably refers to an extraterrestrial body (Source X) that triggers earthquakes. The fact that it is mentioned in the Quran indicates that it had a profound influence on Earth (we need to find out what it is!). Conclusion: The observations and evidence presented here show that there is an unidentified body between Mars and Jupiter. It is the presence of this third party that is responsible for the geomagnetic effects seen on Earth and the Sun. At this point in time we do not know its identity, nature or properties. The UFO wave cycle with a periodicity of about 10 years coincides with the position of a missing planet between Mars and Jupiter. This 10-year cycle could actually represent the orbital period of a celestial body around the Sun. The existence of Source X neatly fills that position. Source X is no longer a planet (that is why it cannot be visually detected) but has transformed into a theoretical magnetized physical body (its magnetic effect is felt on the Earth and the Sun). Its creation was probably the result of its massive gravity-magnetism imbalance that may well have punched a hole in the fabric of space and time. 202 This hole, or a mass of magnetized energy, acted as a door in the sky. This trapped energy escapes through the door intermittently in the form of energetic pulses combined with gravitational and electromagnetic waves. UFOs ,based on the assumption that they are from a technologically advanced civilization, use this ‘hole’ to their advantage. However, this door (of the astrophysical mass) due to its nature and properties, does not provide UFOs with the choice to operate at will in time and space. As can be seen in the distribution pattern of UFOs, their time-on-station averages about 5 to 20 minutes duration, their flight corridor is along straight lines, and most were limited to night time, usually between 8 and 10 pm and their location was limited to areas with geomagnetic anomalies, especially in areas of seismic activity. UFOs are only present on Earth in large numbers during a UFO wave only once a year, but this too is limited in time and space. They have to wait on average about 9 to 11 months for large scale visits to Earth (as seen by the periodicity in the occurrence of major UFO waves). Source X therefore acts as a shortcut, bridging the distance from distant galaxies to Earth. It is the main contributor for the UFO phenomenon on Earth. It also regulates and limits the number of UFO appearances. For this reason we see that many types of UFO beings are clustered in the same area during a UFO wave. The geographical location of isolated UFO appearances, or clusters of UFO events (during UFO waves), must be aligned with the door for entry to Earth and they must return in good time, as Source X is moving as it orbits around the Sun. For this reason, UFOs do not venture far from their initial point of appearance. To catch or enter the door of a moving train you must be at the right place at the right time. On numerous occasions UFOs are seen stationary in the sky as if waiting for this door to open before brightening up and shooting up towards it. Waves, both electromagnetic and gravitational, are emitted from Source X in different modes in the form of pulses. They are released independently or in tandem at various intervals for 11 years, then synchronize every 22 years. We see this in the patterns observed in large earthquakes and major UFO waves. These energy pulses are also responsible for causing the geomagnetic jerks observed on Earth on average about once every 10 years. The 22-year synchronicity is also seen in the magnetic field reversal of the Sun. The Sun changes its magnetic poles every 11 years, but reverts to its 203 original position every 22 years. Source X therefore acts as a regulator which controls the events on Earth and the Sun in the same periodic manner. The orbit of Source X around the Sun, passing over the North and South Poles of Earth, has a demagnetizing effects on the Earth’s magnetic field at the poles over time. In the short term it causes the weakening of the Earth’s magnetic field. In the long term it will cause a magnetic pole reversal. The appearance of UFOs in our world represents the Jinn (as mentioned in the Quran) and they are still unknown to science. As there are many type of Jinn scattered all across the universe, we see them in various shapes and sizes. All of their manifestations on Earth are scattered in seismic zones as isolated random events or occasionally they are clustered at specific geographical areas.Their affinity for appearing before, during or after earthquakes is the result of the electromagnetic energy being discharged at around the same time as the gravitational waves, or to be precise, about 5 hours before or after. The high number of UFOs seen in seismic zone is probably due to the nature of the fracture lines with their magnetic anomalies, which provide the ideal conditions to sustain flight. Since UFOs are electromagnetic in nature, they use an electromagnetic beam to fly along (like a railway line). The presence of the UFO phenomenon in our reality has opened a door for us to get a glimpse of the relationship between sunspots, geomagnetic reversal, geomagnetic jerks, polar wanderings etc and unsolved events like UFOs and earthquakes and see that they all share the same common denominator. All the observations and evidence relating to UFOs and earthquakes as been assembled in this book and shows them to be related. Further collaborating evidence from other observable geological and geomagnetic effects on the Earth and the Sun is also put forward. The presence of an unknown body in the Solar System, as the evidence strongly suggests, could act as the common denominator for all the events mentioned above. With these observations, the UFO-earthquake jigsaw puzzle has been finally pieced together. With it we now have an almost complete picture. The only question that remain, is this: is Source X really out there? Only the scientific community, especially astrophysicists, can give us the answer. 204 References. Ahmad Jamaludin, A Summary of Unidentified Flying Objects and Related Events in Malaysia, 1950-1980, Self- published, December 1981. Ahmad Jamaludin, “The Geographical Migration of UFO Waves: A Ten Year Cycle.” The UFO Register, Vol. 10, No. 1, 1979. Ahmad Jamaludin, “UFO Wave.” The Unopened Files, No. 4, autumn 1997, pages 16-20. Ahmad Jamaludin, 60 Years of Neglected Evidence: Analysis of Global Humanoid Encounter Reports, 1946-2006, Xlibris, 2011. Ahmad Jamaludin, Handbook on How to Predict Earthquakes, A Valid Theory Makes Valid Predictions, Partridge, 2019. Aime Michel, Flying Saucers and the Straight-line Mystery. New York: Criterion, 1958. Alex Mebane, “The 1957 Saucer Wave in the United States,” in Aimé Michel, Flying Saucers and the Straight-line Mystery, S.G. Phillips, New York, 1958, pages 233-277 Alessandro Morbidelli & Brett Gladman, Orbital and temporal distributions of meteorites originating in the asteroid belt, Meteoritics & Planefury Science 33,999-1016 (1998) Antonio Ribera, “UFO Waves Follow a Certain Pattern.” Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 5, No. 3, May-June 1959, pages 12-14. Antonio Ribera, “Bavic” in the Iberian Peninsula, Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 9 No.5, Sept-Oct 1963, pp 30-32. Antonio Ribera, UFO Survey of Spain: More Evidence, Flying Saucer Review, Vol.9 No.1, Jan-Feb 1963, pp 14-17. Anders Liljegren & Clas Svahn, “The Ghost Rockets,” [1946] in Hilary Evans & John Spencer (eds.), UFOs 1947-1987, Fortean Tomes, London, 1987, pages 3238 Bernard E. Finch, The UFO “Gate” Theory, Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 26, No.1, June 1980, page 24. Bill Gibbons & Jenny Randles, Close Encounters with Animal Effects, Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 27, No,4, January 1982, page 28. 205 Bjorn Overbye, Ghost-Bombs Over Sweden Part I, Flying Saucer Review, Vol.15 No.2, March-April 1969, pp 17-18 &Flying Saucer Review, Vol.15 No.3, May-June 1969, pp 18-19. Carl Grove, “The airship wave of 1909.” Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 16, No. 6, November-December 1970, pages 9-11; and Vol. 17, No. 1, January-February 1971, pages 17-19. Charles Bowen (ed), The Humanoids, Futura, 1974 Charles Davison, Twin-Earthquakes, Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, 61, 18-34, 1 February 1905. Chris Rutkowski, “The Canadian UFO Wave of 1989.” International UFO Reporter, Vol. 14, No. 6, November-December 1989, pages 7-9. Claude Poher and Jacques Vallee, Basic Patterns in UFO Observations, American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronautics Inc (1975) Claude Poher, Time Correlations between Geomagnetic Disturbances and Eye Witness Accounts of UFOs, Flying Saucer Review, Vol,20 No.1, July 1974 Curtis Peebles, “UFO Flaps and Social Factors,” in Watch the Skies! Smithsonian Institution Press, Washington, D.C., 1994, pages 286-287, http://tinyurl.com/qexphgv Daniel Cohen, The Great Airship Mystery, [1896-1897] Dodd, Mead & Co., New York, 1981, David Clarke, “Scareship over Britain: The Airship Wave of 1909.” Fortean Studies, Vol. 6, 1999, pages 39-63. David Webb, 1973: Year of the Humanoids, December 1974 (62 pages). Enlarged version: 1973 - Year of the Humanoids, Center for UFO Studies, Evanston, Illinois, May 1976 David R. Saunders, “A Spatio-Temporal Invariant for Major UFO Waves,” in Proceedings of the 1976 CUFOS Conference, Nancy Dornbos (ed.), CUFOS, Evanston, Illinois, May 1976, pages 231-233 Donald A. Johnson, “Revival of 61-Month Wave Theory.” The MUFON UFO Journal, No. 241, May 1988, page 16 Donald B. Hanlon, “Virginia 1965 Flap.” Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 12, No. 2, March-April 1966, pages 14-16 206 Donald H. Menzel, Do Flying Saucers Move in Straight Lines? Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 10 No.2, Mar-Apr. 1964, pp 3-7. Edward J. Ruppelt, “The Big Flap,” [1952] in The Report on Unidentified Flying Objects, Doubleday, Garden City, New York, 1956, pages 139-156 Gordon Creighton, “A New South American ‘Wave’.” Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 14, No. 5, September-October 1968, pages 23-28 Gordon Creighton, Argentina 1962, A Massive UFO Visitation, Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 10 No.4, July-Aug. 1964, pages 10-13. Gordon Creighton, A Brief Account of the True Nature of the UFO Entities, Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 29, No: 1, October 1983 G. MacCarthy, A Marked Alignment of Earthquake Epicenters in Western North Carolina and its Tectonic Implications, Journal of the Elisha Mitchell Scientific Society, 71, no.2 (November 1956) 763-770. Han, Y., Guo, Z., Wu, J. & Ma, L. Possible triggering of solar activity to big earthquakes (Ms ≥ 8) in faults with near west–east strike in China. Sci. China Ser. B Phys. Mech. Astron. 47, 173–181. (2004). Huzaimy, J. M. & Yumoto, K. Possible correlation between solar activity and global seismicity. In Proc. 2011 IEEE International Conference on Space Science and Communication. Penang Malaysia, 138–141 (2011). Irving E. Anderson, “The Periodicity of Flaps,” in Proceedings of the 1976 CUFOS Conference, Nancy Dornbos (ed.), CUFOS, Evanston, Illinois, May 1976, pages 1- 5 J. Bernard Delair, “The Prediction of UFO Waves,” in Charles F. Lockwood & Anthony R. Pace (eds.), Proceedings – Second National Research and Investigation Conference, BUFORA (November 1976), London, 1978, pages 21-32 J. Bernard Delair, “Synopsis of the Great World-Wide UFO Wave of 1973.” The UFO Register, Vol. 5, Parts 1 and 2, December 1974, pages 8-94. J. Allan Danelek, The Great Airship of 1897, Adventures Unlimited, Kempton, Illinois, 2010 Jacques Vallee, Ghost Rockets: A Moment of History, Flying Saucer Review, Vol.10 No.4, July-Aug. 1964, pages 30-32. 207 Jean-Michel Abrassart, The Beginning of the Belgian UFO wave, Academia.com Jenny Randles, “The Great Wave,” [1977] in The Pennine UFO Mystery, Granada, London, 1983, pages 108-111 Jenny Randles, “Anatomy of a Wave.” International UFO Reporter, Vol. 11, No. 2, March-April 1986, pages 4-8 & 19. Leonard H. Stringfield, Situation Red: The UFO Siege, Fawcett Crest Books 1977 Leonard H. Stringfield, UFO Crash/Retrievals: Amassing the Evidence: Status Report III. 1982: Self-published. Jeremy Bloxham et al, "The origin of geomagnetic jerks". Nature. 420 (6911): 65–68, November 2002. Jinlai Hao et al, Evidence for diurnal periodicity of earthquakes from midnight to daybreak, National Science Review, 6: 1016–1023, 2019 John Gribbin, Relation of Sunspot and Earthquake Activity, Science 06 Aug 1971:Vol. 173, Issue 3996, pp. 558 John A. Keel, “North America 1966. Development of a Great Wave.” Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 13, No. 2, March-April 1967, pages 3-9. Johnson, Donald A. "New lines in UFO research: Orthoteny revisited," International UFO Reporter, 25, no. 1 (Spring 2000): 18-19, 32. Joseph Trainor, “The New England Airship Invasion of 1909.” Fortean Studies, Vol. 1, 1994, pages 59-70. Joseph W. Ritrovato, “Analyzing UFO Waves.” The MUFON UFO Journal, No. 323, March 1995, pages 3-7 & 17 Kevin H. Knuth, et al, Estimating Flight Characteristics of Anomalous Unidentified Aerial Vehicles, Entropy 2019, 21, 939 Loren E. Gross, The Mystery of Ghost Rockets, [1946] Fremont, California, 1972. Also: UFO`s: A History: 1946: The Ghost Rockets, 1982 and 1988 Loren E. Gross, “The UFO Wave of 1947-California: June 25-July 16,” in Proceedings of the 1976 CUFOS Conference, Nancy Dornbos (ed.), CUFOS, Evanston, Illinois, May 1976, pages 80-88, 208 Loren E. Gross, The UFO Wave of 1896, Fremont, California, 1974. Also: UFOs: A History. 1896, December 1987 M. Ando, Source mechanisms and tectonic significance of historical earthquakes along the Nankai trough. Tectonophysics 27, 119–40, 1975 M.W. Ovenden, Bode's Law and the Missing Planet, Nature, 239, 508 (1972) Martin Kottmeyer, “The Global Wave of 1954.” The REALL News, Vol. 14, No. 8, December 2006, pages 1, 3-5 & 7 Martin Vallée & Claudio Satriano, Geophysical Research Letters, 15 March 2014. Marilia Tavares et al, Influences of solar cycles on earthquakes, Natural Science, Vol.3, No.6, 436-443, 2011. Masashi Hayakawa Ed. : Atmospheric and Ionospheric Electromagnetic Phenomena Associated with Earthquakes, p. 996, Terra Sci. Pub. Co., Tokyo (1999). Masashi Hayakawa, “Electromagnetic phenomena associated with earthquakes: A frontier in terrestrial electromagnetic noise environment”, Recent Res. Devel. Geophysics, Vol. 6, pp. 81-112 (2004) Mauge, Claude. "Orthoteny: Lost cause, or a redeemed one?" International UFO Reporter, 25, no. 3 (Fall 2000): 24-28. Michael Shimshoni, Evidence for higher siesmic activity during the night, Geophysical Journal International, Volume 24, Issue 1, 97–99, October 1971. Michael A. Persinger and Gyslaine F. Lafreniere, Space-Time Transients and Unusual Events, Nelson-Hall, 1977 Michael A. Persinger. Earthquake activity and antecedent UFO report numbers. Perceptual and Motor Skills, 50(3, Pt 1), 791–797 (1980) Nigel Watson, Granville Oldroyd & David Clarke, The 1912-1913 British Phantom Airship Scare Catalogue, Fund for UFO Research, Washington, D.C., 1988. Nigel Watson, “The New Zealand Invasion (1909),” in The Scareship Mystery: A Survey of Phantom Airship Scares 1909-1918, Nigel Watson (ed.), Dorma Books, Northamptonshire, 2000, pages 29-38. 209 Nigel Watson, “Were You Flying Your Airship Last Night? Phantoms over the USA 1909- 1910,” in The Scareship Mystery: A Survey of Phantom Airship Scares 1909-1918,Nigel Watson (ed.), Dorma Books, Northamptonshire, 2000, pages 39-51. Nigel Watson, “Did a German Airship Fly over Sheerness in 1912?” in ‘The Scareship Mystery: A Survey of Phantom Airship Scares’ 1909-1918, Nigel Watson (ed.), Dorma Books, Northamptonshire, 2000, pages 52-60. Nigel Watson, “Here Comes the Airship! The British 1912-1913 Scare,” in The Scareship Mystery: A Survey of Phantom Airship Scares 1909-1918, Nigel Watson (ed.), Dorma Books, Northamptonshire, 2000, pages 61-75. Paola De Michelis et al, "Geomagnetic jerks: observation and theoretical modeling" Memorie della Società Astronomica Italiana. 76: 957–960. (2005) Paul Norman, Electro-Magnetic Effects of UFOs, Flying Saucer Review, Vol.11 No.5, Sept-Oct. 1965, pages 26-28. Peter M. Seeviour, Foundation of Orthoteny, Flying Saucer Review, Vol.11 No.2, March-April 1965, pp 10-12. Peter A. Sturrock, Time-Series Analysis of a Catalog of UFO Events: Evidence of a Local-Sidereal-Time Modulation, Journal of Scientific Exploration, Vol. 18, No. 3, pp. 399–419, 2004 Philip J. Klass, “The 1973 UFO Flap,” UFOs Explained, Random House, New York, 1974, pages 278-292 Richard Hall, “Signals, Noise, and UFO Waves.” International UFO Reporter, Vol. 23, No. 4, winter 1998, pages 16-20. Robert E. Bartholomew, “Michigan and the Great Mass Hysteria Episode of 1897.” Michigan Historical Review, Vol. 24, No. 1, spring 1998, pages 133-141. Robert E. Bartholomew et al, “Expanding the Boundary of Moral Panics: The Great New Zealand Zeppelin Scare of 1909.” New Zealand Sociology, Vol. 13, No. 1, May 1998, pages 29-61. Robert E. Bartholomew, “War Scare Hysteria in the Delaware Region in 1916.” Delaware History, Vol. 28, No. 1, spring-summer 1998, pages 71-76 Robert G. Neeley, Jr., UFOs of 1896-1897: The Airship Wave, Fund for UFO Research, Washington, D.C., 1988. 210 Robert G. Neeley, Jr., “1897: The Airship in Illinois.” Journal of UFO Studies, Vol. I, No. 1, 1979, pages 49-69, http://www.cufos.org/pubs3.html Scholz, C. Worldwide Distribution of Earthquakes. Nature 221, 165 (1969) Simpson, J. F. “Solar activity as a triggering mechanism for earthquakes”. Earth Planet. Sci. Lett. 3, 417–425 (1967). Steven Sherburn, Characteristics of earthquake sequences in the Central Volcanic Region, New Zealand, New Zealand Journal of Geology and Geophysics, 35:1, 57-68, 1992. Ted Bloecher, Report on the UFO Wave of 1947, National Investigations Committee on Aerial Phenomena [NICAP](1967). Ted Phillips, Physical Traces Associated with UFO Sightings, Center For UFO Studies, January 1975. Thomas E. Bullard, “Waves.” International UFO Reporter, Vol. 13, No. 6, November-December 1988, pages 15-23 Thomas E. Bullard, “Newly discovered ‘airship’ waves over Poland.” [1892 & 1913] Flying Saucer Review, Vol. 29, No. 3, May-June 1984, pages 12-14. Thomas W. Conwell, Earthquakes And UFOs; Their Link is Not What You Think, Amazon (2020). T.R. LeMaire, Stones From the Stars, The Unsolved Mysteries of Meteorites, Prentice-Hall, 1980. Vicente-Juan Ballester Olmos & Jacques Vallée, “Waves of activity,” in “Type1 Phenomena in Spain and Portugal”, Flying Saucer Review Special Issue No. 4, August 1971, pages 59-61. Vicente-Juan Ballester Olmos & Jacques Bonabot, “The World-Wide Wave of 1950": Further Enquiries.” Data-Net Report, October 1972, pages 2-9. Vito Marchitelli et al, On the correlation between solar activity and large earthquakes worldwide, Scientific Reports volume 10, Article number: 11495 (2020) W. Mcd. Napier & R. J. Dodd, The Missing Planet. Nature 242, 250–251 (1973) Wim van Utrecht, “The Belgian 1989-1990 UFO Wave,” in UFOs 1947-1997, Hilary Evans & Dennis Stacy (eds.), John Brown, London, May 1997, pages 165- 174, 211 Willy Wegner, “The Mystery ‘Airship’ over Denmark in 1908.” The UFO Register, Vol. 8, Part 1, November 1977, pages 3-8. Xue Yan et al, Characteristics of seismic activity before several large Sumatra, Indonesia, earthquakes, Acta Seismologica Sinica, Vol.21 No.3, 325-329, May 2008. *** 212 APPENDIX A TIME DILATION OBSERVED IN UFO AND BUNIAN ABDUCTION EVENTS Time dilation is the difference in time experienced by the human body that is moving at speed in space and one that is stationary on Earth. Time, therefore is directly related to velocity. The faster that one travels, the slower time would exert an influence on the body. This was predicted and shown to be correct by Einstein’s Theory of Relativity. However, the same theory does not take into account time dilation in parallel worlds or universes. First of all, we have no knowledge that they exist. In those dimensions, our laws of physics break down and velocity is not part of the equation. However time dilation still occurs, but with a different set of parameters. Let’s take a look at some of the UFO abduction episodes which clearly showed the interaction with time, when the victims were taken away to some unknown destination and returned several days later. Case #1 On May 4, 1969, in Bebedouro in the State of Minas Gerais, Brazil, Jose Antonio da Silva, 24, an enlisted soldier was fishing in a lagoon when he was seized by two beings and dragged to an unknown object sitting on a road. The object took off and da Silva regained consciousness 4.5 days later and 200 miles away from where he was abducted. He suffered from temporary amnesia. Case #2 In 1974, at Colatina, in the State of Espiritu Santo in Brazil, Onilson Patero was driving one night, when a light appeared in the sky and threw him into a state of panic. He lost consciousness and woke up 5 days later in a field minus his car. He could not explain what had happened. Case #3 On November 5, 1975, Travis Walton was working near Snowflake, Arizona with six other friends, when they encountered a saucer-shaped object hovering above the ground. Walton got out of the truck and approached the object. A beam of light shot out of the object and knocked him unconscious. 213 He vanished in plain sight of his friends, who immediately fled the area. Walton reappeared 5 days later, but could not remember what had happened. Case #4 On April 25, 1977, Corporal Valdes of the Chilean army, stationed near the Bolivian border, vanished in front of his men when a UFO appeared near him. Valdes reappeared 15 minutes later with 5 days growth of beard. His wrist watch indicated that 5 days had elapsed. He fainted when he appeared and later suffered from amnesia. Case #5 On November 26, 1979 Franck Fontaine, 19, who was in Paris, France, went missing when his car was struck with a beam of light. The car was surrounded by a circular halo with little spheres in it. His two friends searched for him, but he was no where to be found. Fontaine appeared at the same location 5 days later unable to recollect what happened to him during the missing time. Case #6 On April 20, 1981, Jorge de Souza Ramos, 25, was driving from Linhares in the State of Espiritu Santo in Brazil to a destination 20 kilometers away, when he was blinded by an intensely bright light. He then lost consciousness. He woke up 5 days later in the town of Goiania, 980 kilometers to the northwest of Linhares. He could not recall what had happened during those 5 days. Case #7 This incident was included as the victim went missing under mysterious circumstances and his body was later found in an unexplained situation. In June 1980, Zigmund Adamski, a 56 year old miner, went missing from his home in Tingley, near Wakefield in Yorkshire, United Kingdom. He had gone out to do some shopping, but mysteriously went missing. His body was found 20 miles from his home at a coal yard in Todmorden 5 days later. On the back of his head, neck and shoulders were mysterious burn marks and the presence of an inexplicable substance which baffled scientists. Six of the seven cases above had three things in common i.e it involved a UFO, the victims suffered temporary amnesia and they were missing for about 5 days. Now let us take a look at abduction (or a controlled invitation) to another dimension or world that occasionally takes place in Malaysia. The locals call these dimensional entities the Bunian people. 214 The Bunians are not UFO entities, they possess no flying objects, they look human and speak the local language, but yet do not belong to this world. The Malays believed that they are spiritual or dimensional beings from a parallel world. Case #1 On January 26, 1982, at the Army Training Camp at Port Dickson, an 18 yearold recruit, Abdul Mutalib Hussein, mysteriously vanished with his M-16 rifle while on sentry duty in the early morning before dawn. He was found 2 days later in the same area in a dazed condition. He recalled that he was taken to a beautiful, strange place. Case #2 On January 27, 1982, 40 year-old Zainab Hussein walked out of her house at 8 am near Muar and mysteriously went missing. Many villagers conducted a search for her, but to no avail. Four days later, at 8.15 pm her husband heard his wife crying for help. A search party followed the voice and found Zainab 200 yards from her house. She was in in a state of physical exhaustion and had no recollection of her missing time. Case #3 On June 6, 1982 at Kuala Triang, Maswati Pilus, aged 12, was asked by her mother at 10 am, to wash some clothes by the side of a river behind their house. At 12 noon, her mother realised that Maswati was long overdue. A search was conducted by the villagers, for they feared that Maswati might have fallen into the river. But they found nothing except a basket of clothes on the river bank. Two days later, Maswati was found not far from her house, but in a semiconscious state. She relates that she was taken by a stranger to a strange but beautiful place. She said that the journey was a short one. Case #4 In early 1995 in Malacca, Jefri Dan aged 14, stepped out of his home in the morning to go to school, but never got there. He went missing along the way. His father and neighbours searched frantically, but Jefri could not be found. Six days later, a friend spotted Jefri under a tree in a dazed mental state. He had a pale face and was very weak. He told his father that he was taken to a strange world at an unusual village, where the people there were all dressed in white. He described the people as friendly. He said that he was there for only 2 days, but six days had passed. 215 Case #5 In early June 2005, four children went missing at Fraser Hill near Raub. The four went sight-seeing in the forest, when they claimed that they saw a ‘beautiful pathway’, which they decided to take. They said that the pathway felt like a different world. After taking the route, the situation suddenly changed to an impenetrable forest. They panicked. A huge search party consisting of Police and Army personal got involved. It was only on the forth day that the children were found in the same area that the search party had combed. Case #6 In 2009, at Ajil, Zainab aged 15 woke up at 4 am to go to the toilet, which was outside their house. Two hours later the family realised that Zainab had not returned. A search that was conducted for the whole day failed to locate her. A police report was made. However, 2 days later she was found not far from their house. Case #7 On January 22, 2017, Azarul Mukhriz, aged 20 was climbing Broga Hill near Semenyeh when he went missing. A search party did not find him for 5.5 days. Due to dehydration he was admitted to the hospital. He later said that he was taken to a beautiful place where all its inhabitants wore white. He saw only two girls during his stay in the strange world, which he described as very beautiful. All of the above cases, while only a handful of beings are described here, show us that there are more things around us than meets the eye are within knowledge. Only science can pave the way to a better understanding of them. UFOs, Bunians, Bigfoot, the Bermuda Triangle and paranormal events beg for scientific scrutiny, but have all fallen on deaf ears (and closed minds). From UFO related events across the world and the mysterious ventures into some strange, parallel world in Malaysia, we can see that time dilation occurs and has significant effects on the victims. For the former, the UFO abductees had the impression that they were in the UFO for minutes or a few hours, but 5 days had elapsed. In the latter cases, it was not a case of forced abduction, but an invitation to follow an unknown human-like being to a different world, which was just a few steps away from our reality. For these cases, the victims had the impression that they were in the location for a short time, but between two to 5.5 days had elapsed. It seems as if they had disappeared from the face of the Earth. 216 While the search parties combed the areas and found nothing, the Bunian victims mysteriously reappeared a few days later in an area that had already been searched. It was like a magical trick – now you see it, now you don’t. But for the Bunian cases, the trick involved not only the victim’s mind, but the eyes of the search party as well. All of these cases indicate that time runs at a different speed when UFOs are involved, also in the strange Bunian world and in our reality. The interesting fact is that for the UFO scenario it lasts between 4 and 5.5 days and in the Bunian world it is between 2 and 5.5 days. A look at 117 UFO abduction cases shows that 2 hours is the most common missing time experienced by UFO abductees (24%). Only in 3.4% of the cases was the victim missing for 4-5 days, and 6.8% were gone for two days (Jamaludin, 2011). This shows us that there are parallel universes and worlds besides our own. At this point in time we are not able to prove that a multiverse or parallel dimensions exist, but the time dilation experienced during UFO abductions and Bunian events suggests that they do. *** 217 APPENDIX B GLOBAL RECORDS AND TRENDS OF METEORITE FALLS. Meteors originate from two sources, one is the Asteroid Belt and the other is from outside the Solar System. They come in three forms, iron, stony and stonyirons. Meteors can be classified into three groups, meteor showers, unscheduled meteors and hermit kings. In the first group, meteor showers come with clocklike precision; for example the Orionids appear from October 2 to November 7, the Southern Taurids from September 10 to November 20, and so on. The unscheduled meteors reach the Earth randomly and fall to Earth in various sizes. The third group of meteors known as ‘Hermit Kings’ are uncommon events. Only 5 are known to have reached the Earth. Interestingly, all five appeared in a three week period, between February 17 and March 8. The meteor showers originate from a specific radiant in space, while the ‘Hermit Kings’ came from the cosmos based on the Earth’s orbital position around the Sun in mid February to early March. Most of the meteorite falls (meteor showers excluded) were at their peak around 3 p.m and drastically declined 12 hours later. Most of the falls were recorded in the United States and India. But Western Europe had the highest number, if all the nations in it were counted as one, as there were 317 recorded falls. The Table below lists the meteorites that have been documented to date. Table 1: Records of Global Meteorite Falls Country United States India France China Russia Japan Ukraine Germany Italy Argentina Size of Area( Sq. Km) 8,080,464 3,287,263 643,801 9,596,961 17,125,200 377,915 603,628 357,386 301,338 2,780,400 No of Meteorite Fall 146 127 63 58 47 42 32 32 31 24 218 Percentage 13.28 11.55 5.73 5.27 4.27 3.82 2.91 2.91 2.82 2.18 Spain Brazil South Africa Mexico United Kingdom Indonesia Canada Australia Czech Republic Pakistan Nigeria Turkey Poland Sweden Niger Norway Bangladesh Burkina Faso Tanzania Algeria Romania Sudan Bulgaria Hungary Ireland Kazakhstan Morocco Portugal Democratic Republic of Congo Ethiopia Finland Malawi Slovenia Tunisia Uganda Croatia Austria Lithuania Latvia 505,990 8,515,767.049 1,219,912 1,972,550 242,495 23 22 21 19 18 2.09 2.00 1.91 1.73 1.63 1,904,569 9,984,670 7,617,930 78,866 881,913 923,768 783,562 312,679 450,295 1,267,000 385,207 148,460 274,200 945,087 2,381,741 238,397 1,886,068 110,994 93,030 84,421 2,724,900 446,550 92,212 2,345,410 16 16 16 15 15 14 12 11 9 9 9 8 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.36 1.36 1.27 1.09 1.00 0.82 0.82 0.82 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.54 0.54 0.54 0.54 0.54 0.54 0.45 1,127,127 338,440 118,484 20,271 163,610 241,037 56,594 83,879 65,300 64,589 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36 219 Kenya Denmark Netherlands Philippines Saudi Arabia Serbia Switzerland Angola Belarus Belgium Myanmar Cameroon Estonia Mauritania Slovakia South Korea South Sudan Thailand Vietnam Western Sahara Armenia Azerbaijan Cambodia Iran Iraq Mali Namibia Papua New Guinea Somalia Turkmenistan Uzbekistan Venezuela Yemen Zimbabwe Afghanistan Bosnia and Herzegovina Central African Republic Chad Chile 580,367 42,933 41,543 300,000 2,150,000 88,361 41,285 1,246,620 207,595 30,689 676,575 475,442 45,227 1,030,700 49,035 100,210 619,745 513,120 331,212 266,000 29,743 86,600 181,035 1,648,195 437,072 1,240,000 824,292 462,840 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.27 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 637,657 491,210 448,978 916,445 527,968 390,757 652,860 51,197 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.09 0.09 622,984 1 0.09 1,284,000 756,950 1 1 0.09 0.09 220 Colombia Costa Rica Ecuador Ghana Greece Jordan Lebanon Lesotho Libya Madagascar Mauritius New Caledonia New Zealand Paraguay Peru Rwanda Sri Lanka Swaziland Syria Zambia TOTAL 1,141,748 51,100 283,560 238,535 131,957 89,342 10,452 30,355 1,759,540 587,041 2,040 18,575 268,021 406,752 1,285,220 26,338 65,610 17,364 185,180 752,618 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1099 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.09 100 Meteorites are not just stones from the sky. Where they came from and what pushed them out of orbit is important and needs consideration. If meteors appearances are related to earthquakes and UFOs (see Chapter 9), it becomes clear that there is something in the sky that is causing all three apparently unrelated phenomena to choose Earth as (a) their destination and (b) strike the same area on Earth. Iron meteorites seem to prefer the western part of the United States, along a corridor 400 km wide and over 3500 km long. It stretches from Mexico to Washington State. Meanwhile, stony rocks apparently prefer the Midwestern States, with the main concentration being around the Appalachians. It appears as if “someone” is throwing the iron meteors in a straight corridor and the ‘stonies’ in a circular region on the other side of the United States. Something does not look right, as no one is ‘throwing’ the meteors at specific parts of the world. 221 With regards to meteorite falls, in a normal scenario several witnesses would observe a flaming ball of fire in the night sky that came smashing into the ground. It is one of many meteorites that regularly strike the Earth each year. And in the same area, an earth tremor is often felt. It could either be from the impact of the meteorite, or it could be a genuine earthquake. Then in the same area, there are often reports of anomalous bright lights called UFOs flying in the sky. And if these luminous lights land on the ground, there are often reports of encounters with strange non-human UFO occupants. So why do we have all three unrelated events in the same spot, i.e. meteors, earthquakes and unidentified flying objects? Why do they all choose the same spot? If it’s God’s will then it is at His discretion. But every event in the universe abides by a set of rules based on the laws of physics. For every action there is an equal and opposite reaction. The same laws of physics govern everything in the universe. If asteroids and meteoroids are in “hibernation” harmlessly orbiting the Sun, then suddenly something crosses the Asteroid Belt and throws a large chunk of metal or rock hurling towards Earth, we see it as a bright, flaming meteor and when it strikes the ground we call it a meteorite. We have seen in Chapter 9 how meteorites are either seen in the sky or falling to the ground on numerous occasions when UFOs and earthquakes are also in the area. This raises the question of whether meteorite falls to Earth are associated with the existence of Source X in our Solar System. While the existence of Source X is still speculative, the existence of UFOs and the occurrence of earthquakes seems to indicate that a common denominator must be present to tie both events together. The appearance of meteors at the same time only indicates that we might have overlooked the possible existence of an unknown, astrophysical body in our backyard. Let us take a look at the trends seen in meteorite falls on Earth as summarized in Table 2 below. Table 2: Nature of Meteorite Falls, UFOs and Earthquakes Nature Location Distribution Time Average per Year Observations for UFOs, Earthquakes & Meteorite Falls Occur in the same area Distributed in a straight line corridor or as a cluster in some regions Mostly at night Steady number 222 As we have seen, there are three types of meteorite, composed of iron, stone and stone/iron and each type seems to have a preference for specific regions on Earth. Meteorites cannot choose in which area they prefer to land. Only a celestial regulator can determine where and when any meteors are moved from their orbits and sent hurtling elsewhere. Not all meteors originating in the Asteroid Belt are sent heading towards Earth. Only a small fraction of the meteors head towards Earth. A good percentage are headed away from us. The ones that reach us indicate a clue regarding the mystery of the Asteroid Belt. Table 3 below correlates the number of meteorite falls with the countries that have experienced the greatest number of UFO appearances. All of them have a long history of UFO sightings and most of them have records of UFO waves. Interestingly, most of the falls are located along the UFO wave track as depicted in Figure 1. Only India was out of the wave track, but still received a good share of the meteorite falls. Canada too was a little off the track, but received many UFO events and meteorite falls. Figure 1: Meteorite Falls in Relation to UFO Wave Tracks As noticeable in Figure 1 above, as Source X goes into aphelion in its orbit around the Sun, the concentration of meteorite falls appears to be clustered around Western Europe. For this reason, Western Europe has the largest number of falls with 317 cases. Only one country, India, which was outside the wave track, recorded a high count. On the other hand, countries or regions with few sightings of UFOs also recorded few meteorite falls, generally below 10% or even less than 1%. 223 Table 3: Correlation Between Country with Recorded UFO Waves and Meteorite Falls. Country with UFO Wave/Significant Cluster United States India France China Russia Japan Southeast Asia Germany Ukraine Italy Argentina Spain Brazil South Africa Mexico United Kingdom Scandinavia Australasia Canada Czech Republic Turkey Poland Denmark Belgium Year of UFO Cluster 1896, 1897, 1947, 1952, 1957, 1964, 1965, 1966, 1973, 1975 2001 1954 1980 1989-90 1958 1948, 1970, 1979, 1999 Fallouts 1989 1978 2000 1968 1960, 1973,1978 1914, 1995 1991 1909, 1912-13, 1967, 1977 1946 1909, 1960, 1978 Fallouts Fallouts Fallouts Fallouts Fallouts 1988 Number of Meteorite Falls 146 127 63 58 47 42 33 32 32 31 24 23 22 21 19 18 18 17 16 15 12 11 4 3 The table above gives a good correlation between the countries with meteorite falls and the occurrence of UFO waves. Western Europe had the highest number of falls possibly due to the fact that the orbital position Source X over the Northern Hemisphere, when at aphelion, is much longer than the rest of the world. Because of this, meteorites were aimed at Western Europe for a longer period. In Table 4 below we see a different picture for countries with few reported sightings of UFOs. The number of meteorite falls were below 10 in number. The only exceptions were for Venezuela, Peru, Chile and Bolivia, all of which had a good share of UFO events, but few meteorite falls were recorded. 224 Table 4: Country with no Record of UFO Wave and the Number of Meteorite Falls Country with Little or No UFO Cluster Bangladesh Burkina Faso Tanzania Algeria Romania Sudan Bulgaria Hungary Kazakhstan Ireland Morocco Portugal DR Congo Ethiopia Malawi Slovenia Tunisia Uganda Austria Croatia Kenya Latvia Lithuania Mongolia Netherlands Saudi Arabia Serbia Switzerland Angola Belarus Cameroon Estonia Mauritania Slovakia South Korea Armenia Azerbaijan Egypt Iran Iraq Mali Year of UFO Cluster None None None 1950, 1954 None None None None None Fallouts None None None None None None None None None None None None None None Fallouts None None None None None None Fallouts None None None None None None None None None Number of Meteorite Falls 8 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 225 Namibia Somalia Venezuela Yemen Zimbabwe Afghanistan Bosnia and Herzegovina Central African Republic Chad Chile Colombia Costa Rica Ecuador Ghana Greece Jordan Lebanon Lesotho Libya Madagascar Mauritius Paraguay Peru Rwanda Sri Lanka Syria Zambia None None Fallouts None None None None 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 None 1 None 2000, 2001, Fallouts None None None None None None None None None None None Fallouts Fallouts None None None None 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The fact that meteorite falls, UFO appearances and earth tremors, all occur in the same area or region, is a good place to look for a possible common cause. Between 1950 to 2018, there were 438 meteorite falls recorded. This gives an average of 6.3 falls per year. Large magnitude earthquakes measuring 8.0 and above occurred on average of about one per year. Major UFO waves also occurred about once a year as well. All three events appear to be related and if they are, a major change in any one of them should affect the others. We have not seen this change at present. References T.R. LeMaire, Stones From The Stars, The Unsolved Mysteries of Meteorites, Prentice-Hall, 1980 *** 226 APPENDIX C WHAT TRIGGERS SUNSPOTS? Sunspots refer to dark areas on the surface of the Sun. They are caused by the Sun’s magnetic field surging up to the surface or photosphere. Solar flares and Coronal Mass Ejections (CMEs) originate from these active regions of the Sun. These dark spots are areas with a reduced surface temperature. They are caused by concentrations of the sun’s magnetic field flux inhibiting convection. Sunspots usually appear in pairs of opposite magnetic polarity. The sun has a magnetic field that is about 2,500 times stronger than the Earth’s. Because of this strong magnetic field, the magnetic pressure at the spots increases while the surrounding areas decreases. Individual sunspots, or groups of sunspots, may last from a few days to a few months. However, they eventually decay. Sunspots cluster around 30 degrees of the North and South latitudes of the Sun during maximum solar activity, but during Solar minimum activity, the spots shift to the equatorial region. Sunspots occur in cycles with each cycle lasting about 11 years. The cycle however can fluctuate between 9 and 14 years. The number of sunspots always increases over time but then decreases. A Solar Minimum is when the sunspot counts are at their lowest. At Solar Maximum, the sunspot count is relatively high. Each time the sunspot count fluctuate up or down, the magnetic field associated with the sunspot, reverses polarity. This means that the Sun’s north pole migrates to the south and the south pole goes north. This happens every 11 years, so every 22 years the poles return to their original position. NASA's Solar Dynamics Observatory showed that the Sun was at solar minimum in December 2019 and the last solar maximum was in April 2014. If sunspots, earthquakes and the UFO phenomenon are all related, then during solar maximum, we should see a spike in both the number of UFO sighting reports and the occurrence of earthquakes. The opposite should be the case during a solar minimum. To see if this is the case, let us take a look at the UFO and earthquake data again. Figure 1 charts the sunspot counts for the period 2000 to 2019. Figure 2, 227 showed the number of UFO sightings for the same period from NUFORC with the UFO reports from Southeast Asia included. Figure 3 plots the frequency of earthquakes. Figure 1: Mean Sunspot Numbers Between 2000 to 2019. 200 180 Mean Sunspot Number 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 20002001200220032004200520062007200820092010201120122013201420152016201720182019 Year Figure 2: Number of UFO reports Between 2000 to 2019. 10000 9000 No of UFO Report 8000 7000 6000 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 Year 228 The period of solar activity with sunspot counts on a yearly rise between 2010 and 2015 seem to be followed by an increase in the number of UFO sightings for the same period. This is another indication that there is a “regulator” which affects the events on the Sun in the form of sunspots and on the Earth in the form of UFO sightings. Now let’s see the trend in the occurrence of earthquakes (see Figure 3 below). Figure 3: Number of Earthquakes for the Period 2000 to 2019 18000 16000 No of Earthquake 14000 12000 10000 8000 6000 4000 2000 0 Year The earthquake profile, while generally is on the rise, did not follow the same curve as seen in the sunspot count or the UFO sighting reports. For example, in 2012 and 2013, there was a drop in seismic events on Earth, while sunspot activities on the Sun showed a spike. Is this an indication that sunspots are caused electromagnetically, while earthquakes are gravitationally triggered? Both of these energies, if coming from the same source, are not behaving in the same manner. This means that gravitational and electromagnetic waves are released at different intervals and at different intensities. All of the sunspots seen on the Sun are not primarily from geophysical processes in the Sun’s interior, but could possibly be the result of stimulation by an outside source. This can only come from a strong magnetic source close by. The inference that planets could induce sunspots was first suggested by R. Wolf and later by R.C. Carrington in 1863. 229 Carrington highlighted the variation of sunspot frequency with the radius vector of the planet Jupiter. Jupiter had a 11.87-year sidereal period which is close to the 11-year sunspot cycle. As shown in this book, the possible existence of Source X, between Mars and Jupiter, has an orbital period of about 10-11 years. This could be the reason why Carrington chose Jupiter as the possible culprit, due to its 11-year cycle. But Source X is also close to the same 11 year cycle! And as theorised, Source X is a magnetic body while Jupiter is not. While Jupiter depends on its gravitational influence to induce the formation of sunspots, Source X has sufficient energy to actually offset the Sun’s magnetic field. Source X has a strong enough magnetic emission to flip the Sun’s magnetic poles every 11 years, as it revolved around the Sun on a highly elliptical orbit passing over the Sun’s North and South poles. This would have a “demagnetizing” effect on the Sun’s magnetic field. It does not weaken the Sun’s magnetic field, but is able to cause it to flip at its poles. The same thing happens on Earth, but the process of flipping the Earth’s magnetic poles takes much longer. In the short term, it causes the Earth’s magnetic poles to wander and not be fixed at a permanent location As we have seen, everything in this universe comes in pairs. In our Solar System, if the Sun represents the source of gravity influencing all the planets within its grip, there must be another celestial body present with the opposite energy i.e. electromagnetism. With this strong magnetism, it should be able to influence or exert pressure on all the other planets in the Solar System, including the Sun itself. Are sunspots the direct result of this influence? If that is the case, then the Earth too will be directly affected by the existence of Source X. This influence could come in the form of earthquakes. The occurrence of earthquakes on a daily basis and the effects on the Earth’s magnetic field over a longer term could result with the reversal of the Earth’s magnetic poles. All this can only happen if there is a strong magnetic source in our Solar System. The existence of the UFO Phenomenon adds credence to the possible existence of Source X. References G.A.J Ferris, Planetary Influences on Sunspots, Journal of the British Astronomical Association, Vol. 79, p. 385 – 388 (1969) 230 R.C. Carrington, Observations of the spots on the sun from November 9, 1853, to March 24, 1861, made at Redhill, Williams and Norgate, London (1863). Thomas K. Friedli, Sunspot observations of Rudolf Wolf from 1849 – 1893, Solar Physics, 291:2505-2517 (2016) *** 231 APPENDIX D A SIMPLE GUIDE ON PREDICTING EARTHQUAKES Over the years, even with the aid of modern technology, earthquake prediction still remains unreliable. Some researchers have come to the conclusion that earthquakes cannot be predicted. On the other hand, the controversial subject of UFOs or ufology (the study of Unidentified Flying Objects), surprisingly, has opened an unexpected avenue into the field of seismology. Thanks to the discovery of orthoteny by Aime Michel in 1954 in France, we can use the straight line alignments or orthoteny seen in UFO sightings, to gain an insight into how to use it to predict earthquakes. This is only possible if UFOs and earthquakes have a common denominator. The observation that UFO and earthquake epicentres sometimes cluster at four opposite ends and shift in time like a see-saw, can be used as a simple guide to predicting earthquakes. Figure 1 below shows the arrangement on how the occurrence of the first two quake of the day can be used to determine the next earthquakes. Figure 1: Preliminary Distribution and Prediction of Impending Earthquakes. 232 Based on the above arrangement; 1- If the first two quakes of the day occur at point A and later on at point B, the next possible quake could either be at points C1, C2 or C3. The quake can occur at Points C1 or C2 if the see-saw effect involves a slight change in angle either to the left or right of the first reference line. If there is a major line flip, the quake will be at point C3. 2- If the third quake of the day occurs at Point C1, then the next tremor will occur at Point D3. If it occurs at Point C2, then a reciprocal quake will occur at Point D2. 3- If the reference line flip is at a wide angle and the quake occurs at Point C3, then the expected tremor will be at Point D1. 4- If any of the lines cross several fault lines, there can be several possible earthquake epicentres. But after triangulation, one of them will be precisely where the seismometers would indicate after triangulation These guidelines can be used on a normal day with no major earthquake and its accompanying aftershocks recorded. Occasionally a double or triple quake in close proximity may occur. In this rare case, the above guidelines cannot be used for that short span of time. However, when that type of tremor subsides, the guidelines will apply as usual. Based on this distribution pattern of earthquakes, which seems to be in coordination with each other, with the appropriate computer software, earthquake epicentres can be predicted precisely because we know the location of the fault lines and where the see-saw orientation line crosses any specific fault lines. At present the determination of earthquake epicentres is based on the triangulation of three seismometers. With the appropriate computer software, earthquake epicentres can be accurately determined where the orientation line crossed a specific fault line. The epicentre determined by this method should be exactly the same as the one calculated by triangulation based on seismometer recordings. References. Ahmad Jamaludin, Handbook on How to Predict Earthquakes, A Valid Theory Makes Valid Predictions, Partridge, 2019. Aime Michel, Flying Saucers and the Straight-line Mystery. New York: Criterion, 1958 233 R.J. Geller, et al. Earthquakes Cannot Be Predicted, Science 275, 1616-1617 (March 1997). *** 234 MORE BOOKS FROM FLYING DISK PRESS www.flyingdiskpress.com 235 FLYING DISK PRESS MERCHANDISE https://shop.spreadshirt.co.uk/flying-disk-press-merchandise/ 236